US20150123106A1 - Peeling Method and Light-Emitting Device - Google Patents
Peeling Method and Light-Emitting Device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20150123106A1 US20150123106A1 US14/532,634 US201414532634A US2015123106A1 US 20150123106 A1 US20150123106 A1 US 20150123106A1 US 201414532634 A US201414532634 A US 201414532634A US 2015123106 A1 US2015123106 A1 US 2015123106A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- peeling
- light
- peeled
- substrate
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B43/00—Operations specially adapted for layered products and not otherwise provided for, e.g. repairing; Apparatus therefor
- B32B43/006—Delaminating
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/02—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/04—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier, e.g. PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer
- H01L21/18—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier, e.g. PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer the devices having semiconductor bodies comprising elements of Group IV of the Periodic System or AIIIBV compounds with or without impurities, e.g. doping materials
- H01L21/30—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26
- H01L21/31—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26 to form insulating layers thereon, e.g. for masking or by using photolithographic techniques; After treatment of these layers; Selection of materials for these layers
- H01L21/3105—After-treatment
- H01L21/311—Etching the insulating layers by chemical or physical means
- H01L21/31105—Etching inorganic layers
-
- H01L51/0097—
-
- H01L51/524—
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K71/00—Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K71/80—Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass using temporary substrates
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2309/00—Parameters for the laminating or treatment process; Apparatus details
- B32B2309/08—Dimensions, e.g. volume
- B32B2309/10—Dimensions, e.g. volume linear, e.g. length, distance, width
- B32B2309/105—Thickness
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2315/00—Other materials containing non-metallic inorganic compounds not provided for in groups B32B2311/00 - B32B2313/04
- B32B2315/08—Glass
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2457/00—Electrical equipment
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B38/00—Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
- B32B38/10—Removing layers, or parts of layers, mechanically or chemically
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/683—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping
- H01L21/687—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping using mechanical means, e.g. chucks, clamps or pinches
- H01L21/68714—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping using mechanical means, e.g. chucks, clamps or pinches the wafers being placed on a susceptor, stage or support
- H01L21/68757—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping using mechanical means, e.g. chucks, clamps or pinches the wafers being placed on a susceptor, stage or support characterised by a coating or a hardness or a material
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2221/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof covered by H01L21/00
- H01L2221/67—Apparatus for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L2221/683—Apparatus for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping
- H01L2221/68304—Apparatus for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for supporting or gripping using temporarily an auxiliary support
- H01L2221/68381—Details of chemical or physical process used for separating the auxiliary support from a device or wafer
- H01L2221/68386—Separation by peeling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K2102/00—Constructional details relating to the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K2102/301—Details of OLEDs
- H10K2102/311—Flexible OLED
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/80—Constructional details
- H10K50/84—Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/80—Constructional details
- H10K50/85—Arrangements for extracting light from the devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K77/00—Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
- H10K77/10—Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
- H10K77/111—Flexible substrates
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/11—Methods of delaminating, per se; i.e., separating at bonding face
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/11—Methods of delaminating, per se; i.e., separating at bonding face
- Y10T156/1142—Changing dimension during delaminating [e.g., crushing, expanding, warping, etc.]
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/11—Methods of delaminating, per se; i.e., separating at bonding face
- Y10T156/1168—Gripping and pulling work apart during delaminating
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/11—Methods of delaminating, per se; i.e., separating at bonding face
- Y10T156/1168—Gripping and pulling work apart during delaminating
- Y10T156/1179—Gripping and pulling work apart during delaminating with poking during delaminating [e.g., jabbing, etc.]
- Y10T156/1184—Piercing layer during delaminating [e.g., cutting, etc.]
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/19—Delaminating means
- Y10T156/1961—Severing delaminating means [e.g., chisel, etc.]
- Y10T156/1967—Cutting delaminating means
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/19—Delaminating means
- Y10T156/1978—Delaminating bending means
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an object, a method, or a fabrication method.
- the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture, or a composition of matter.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, a lighting device, and a method for fabricating these devices.
- one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emitting device using an organic electroluminescence (hereinafter also referred to as EL) phenomenon, and a method for fabricating the light-emitting device.
- EL organic electroluminescence
- one embodiment of the present invention relates to a peeling method and a method for fabricating a device including a peeling process.
- a flexible device in which a functional element such as a semiconductor element, a display element, or a light-emitting element is provided over a substrate having flexibility (hereinafter also referred to as a flexible substrate) has been developed.
- Typical examples of the flexible device include, as well as a lighting device and an image display device, a variety of semiconductor circuits including a semiconductor element such as a transistor.
- a technique for fabricating a device including a flexible substrate As a method for fabricating a device including a flexible substrate, a technique has been developed in which a functional element such as a thin film transistor or an organic EL element is formed over a formation substrate (e.g., a glass substrate or a quartz substrate), and then the functional element is transferred to a flexible substrate.
- This technique needs a step of peeling a layer including the functional element from the formation substrate (also referred to as a peeling step).
- Patent Document 1 discloses the following separation technique using laser ablation: a separation layer formed of amorphous silicon or the like is formed over a substrate, a layer to be peeled that includes a thin film element is formed over the separation layer, and the layer to be peeled is bonded to a transfer body with the use of an adhesive layer.
- the separation layer is ablated by laser light irradiation, so that peeling is caused in the separation layer.
- Patent Document 2 discloses a technique in which peeling is conducted by physical force with human hands or the like.
- Patent Document 2 discloses the following separation technique: a metal layer is formed between a substrate and an oxide layer and peeling is caused at the interface between the oxide layer and the metal layer by utilizing a weak bond between the oxide layer and the metal layer at their interface, whereby a layer to be peeled and the substrate are separated.
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Published Patent Application No. H10-125931
- Patent Document 2 Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2003-174153
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a peeling step.
- Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a fabrication process of a device such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device.
- another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a fabrication process of a device such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device that is lightweight, thin, or flexible.
- Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to reduce the amount of dust generated in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to prevent entry of impurities in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve alignment accuracy at the time of attachment of substrates in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable light-emitting device or the like.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- At least a stack that includes the first layer and has stress with a negative value is preferably formed as the layer to be peeled.
- stress with a negative value i.e., compressive stress
- the first layer having stress with a negative value over the peeling layer it is preferable to form, in the stack, at least the first layer having stress with a negative value over the peeling layer, a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer, a third layer having stress with a negative value over the second layer, a fourth layer having stress with a positive value (i.e., tensile stress) over the third layer, and a fifth layer having stress with a negative value over the fourth layer.
- an oxide insulating film may be formed as the first layer
- a nitride insulating film may be formed as the second layer.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a bonding layer while the bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer that overlap the bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a first bonding layer and a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer while the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer overlapped by the second bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- One embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a peeling process.
- One embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a fabrication process of a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device.
- one embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a fabrication process of a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device that is lightweight, thin, or flexible.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a novel light-emitting device, display device, electronic appliance, or lighting device.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a novel peeling method or a novel method for fabricating a device.
- FIGS. 1A to 1F illustrate a peeling method.
- FIGS. 2A to 2C illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 3A to 3D illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 4A to 4D illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 5A to 5D illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 6A to 6D illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 7A to 7D illustrate a peeling method
- FIGS. 8A to 8C illustrate a peeling method.
- FIGS. 9A to 9C illustrate planar shapes of a peeling layer and FIGS. 9D to 9I illustrate examples of electronic appliances.
- FIGS. 10A to 10C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
- FIGS. 11A to 11C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
- FIGS. 12 A 1 , 12 A 2 , 12 B, and 12 C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
- FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
- FIGS. 14 A 1 , 14 A 2 , 14 B, and 14 C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
- FIGS. 15A to 15G illustrate examples of electronic appliances and lighting devices.
- FIGS. 16A to 16C illustrate a peeling method.
- FIGS. 17A and 17B illustrate a sample and an apparatus used for measurement in Example 1.
- FIG. 18 shows measurement results of force required for peeling in Example 1.
- FIG. 19 shows measurement results of force required for peeling in Example 1.
- FIG. 20A illustrates a sample in Example 2
- FIG. 20B shows measurement results of water vapor transmission rates
- FIG. 20C illustrates a structure of an apparatus for measuring water vapor transmission rates in Example 2.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B show optical micrographs of a light-emitting device before and after a preservation test in Example 3.
- FIGS. 22A to 22C are photographs and a diagram illustrating a bending test in Example 4.
- FIGS. 23A to 23C show display conditions of a light-emitting device in Example 5.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate an example of a light-emitting device.
- FIG. 25 shows measurement results of water vapor transmission rates in Example 2.
- FIG. 26 illustrates a bent portion in Example 4.
- FIGS. 27A to 27C show results of a bending test and a preservation test in Example 4.
- FIGS. 28A to 28C show results of a bending test and a preservation test in Example 4.
- FIGS. 29A and 29B are photographs of a bend tester in Example 4.
- FIGS. 30A and 30B show a mask pattern and results of a preservation test in Example 2.
- FIGS. 31A to 31C illustrate a method for fabricating an examination sample in Example 2.
- FIGS. 32A and 32B show characteristics of organic EL elements in Example 2.
- FIGS. 33A and 33B show characteristics of organic EL elements in Example 2.
- a layer to be peeled can be formed over a formation substrate, peeled from the formation substrate, and then transferred to another substrate.
- a layer to be peeled that is formed over a formation substrate having high heat resistance can be transferred to a substrate having low heat resistance.
- the temperature at which the layer to be peeled is formed is not limited by the substrate having low heat resistance.
- the layer to be peeled is transferred to a substrate or the like that is more lightweight or flexible or thinner than the formation substrate, whereby a variety of devices such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, or a display device can be made lightweight, flexible, and thin.
- a device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention includes a functional element.
- the functional element include a semiconductor element such as a transistor; a light-emitting diode; a light-emitting element such as an inorganic EL element and an organic EL element; and a display element such as a liquid crystal element.
- a semiconductor device including a sealed transistor and a light-emitting device including a sealed light-emitting element are also examples of the device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- a protective film with an excellent gas barrier property can be formed over a glass substrate at a high temperature and transferred to a flexible organic resin substrate.
- a highly reliable flexible light-emitting device can be fabricated even when the organic resin substrate has low heat resistance and a poor gas barrier property.
- Another example is as follows: after a protective film having an excellent gas barrier property is formed over a glass substrate at a high temperature and an organic EL element is formed over the protective film, the protective film and the organic EL element can be peeled from the glass substrate and transferred to an organic resin substrate having a low heat resistance, a poor gas barrier property, and flexibility.
- a highly reliable flexible light-emitting device can be fabricated by transferring the protective film and the organic EL element to the organic resin substrate.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for fabricating a device in which peeling and transfer are performed in the above manner, specifically to a peeling method.
- a peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
- Embodiment 2 as a structure example of a device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention, a flexible light-emitting device including an organic EL element will be described.
- Embodiment 3 electronic appliances and lighting devices each including the device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
- Example of the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
- FIGS. 1A to 1F a peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 1F , FIGS. 2A to 2C , FIGS. 3A to 3D , FIGS. 4A to 4D , FIGS. 5A to 5D , FIGS. 6A to 6D , FIGS. 7A to 7D , FIGS. 8A to 8C , and FIGS. 9A to 9I .
- the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- the layer to be peeled has high tensile stress in the separation of the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, the layer to be peeled is cracked or film breakage is caused in some cases even if peeling can be performed with a small amount of force.
- the layer to be peeled has high compressive stress in the separation of the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, a large amount of force is required for peeling in some cases.
- the yield of peeling is decreased depending on the structure of the layer to be peeled in some cases.
- the present inventors have found out that the force required for peeling depends on the peeling layer as well as the stress on the layer to be peeled.
- the peeling layer with a thickness of, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm is used.
- peeling can be performed with a small amount of force, regardless of the stress on the layer to be peeled.
- the layer to be peeled can be prevented from being cracked when peeled regardless of the stress on the layer to be peeled.
- the yield of a peeling process can be improved regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
- At least a stack that includes the first layer and has stress with a negative value is preferably formed as the layer to be peeled.
- the stress on the stack included in the layer to be peeled is compressive stress, the layer to be peeled can be prevented from being cracked when peeled.
- the stress on each layer included in the stack is not necessarily compressive stress as long as the stress on the entire stack is compressive stress.
- the stack may include a layer with tensile stress and a layer with compressive stress.
- the yield of the peeling process can be improved even when N 2 O plasma treatment is not performed between the first step and the fourth step in the above peeling method. This can simplify a fabrication process of a device fabricated by the peeling method.
- a tungsten oxide film can be formed between the tungsten film and the first layer by N 2 O plasma treatment.
- N 2 O plasma treatment enables the layer to be peeled to be peeled with a small amount of force.
- the tungsten oxide film when the tungsten film and the tungsten oxide film are separated at their interface, the tungsten oxide film might remain on the layer to be peeled side. In addition, the remaining tungsten oxide film might adversely affect the characteristics of a transistor. Thus, it is preferable to perform a step of removing the tungsten oxide film after the step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- N 2 O plasma treatment does not need to be performed in the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention as described above, a step of removing a tungsten oxide film is also not performed. Thus, a device can be fabricated more easily.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a bonding layer while the bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer that overlap the bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- the yield of peeling can be improved.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a first bonding layer and a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer while the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer overlapped by the second bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- the yield of peeling can be improved.
- the layer to be peeled can be sealed by both the first bonding layer and the second bonding layer; thus, the reliability of a device to be fabricated can be increased.
- each peeling method the use of a thin peeling layer with a thickness of less than 10 nm enables a layer to be peeled to be peeled from a formation substrate with a small amount of peeling force regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
- the thickness of the entire peeling layer be, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm
- at least part of the peeling layer may have a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm.
- preferably 50% or more of the peeling layer, more preferably 90% or more of the peeling layer may have a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm.
- part of the peeling layer may have a thickness of less than 0.1 nm or greater than or equal to 10 nm.
- a peeling layer 103 is formed to a thickness of less than 10 nm over a formation substrate 101 , and a layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer 103 ( FIG. 1A ).
- a layer to be peeled 105 may be formed to have an island shape.
- a material of the peeling layer 103 can be selected such that peeling occurs at the interface between the formation substrate 101 and the peeling layer 103 , the interface between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 , or in the peeling layer 103 when the layer to be peeled 105 is peeled from the formation substrate 101 .
- peeling occurs at the interface between the layer to be peeled 105 and the peeling layer 103
- one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example depending on the material used for the peeling layer 103 or the layer to be peeled 105 .
- a layer in contact with the peeling layer 103 is particularly referred to as a first layer.
- the thickness of the peeling layer 103 can be, for example, less than 10 nm, preferably less than or equal to 8 nm, further preferably less than or equal to 5 nm, still further preferably less than or equal to 3 nm.
- the peeling layer 103 is preferably as thin as possible, in which case the yield of peeling can be improved.
- the thickness of the peeling layer 103 may be, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm, preferably greater than or equal to 0.5 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 1 nm.
- the peeling layer 103 is preferably as thick as possible, in which case the peeling layer 103 can be uniform.
- the thickness of the peeling layer 103 is preferably, for example, greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 8 nm. In this embodiment, a 5-nm-thick tungsten film is used.
- the thickness of the peeling layer 103 is preferably within the range given above throughout the layer. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, at least part of the peeling layer 103 may have the thickness in the range given above. Alternatively, preferably 50% or more of the peeling layer 103 , more preferably 90% or more of the peeling layer 103 , may have the thickness in the range given above. In other words, in one embodiment of the present invention, part of the peeling layer 103 may have a thickness of less than 0.1 mm or greater than or equal to 10 nm.
- the formation substrate 101 a substrate having at least heat resistance high enough to withstand process temperature in a fabrication process is used.
- a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a semiconductor substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate, a resin substrate, or a plastic substrate can be used.
- a glass substrate having any of the following sizes or a larger size can be used: the 3rd generation (550 mm ⁇ 650 mm), the 3.5th generation (600 mm ⁇ 720 mm or 620 mm ⁇ 750 mm), the 4th generation (680 mm ⁇ 880 mm or 730 mm ⁇ 920 mm), the 5th generation (1100 mm ⁇ 1300 mm), the 6th generation (1500 mm ⁇ 1850 mm), the 7th generation (1870 mm ⁇ 2200 mm), the 8th generation (2200 mm ⁇ 2400 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm ⁇ 2800 mm or 2450 mm ⁇ 3050 mm), and the 10th generation (2950 mm ⁇ 3400 mm).
- the 3rd generation 550 mm ⁇ 650 mm
- the 3.5th generation 600 mm ⁇ 720 mm or 620 mm ⁇ 750 mm
- the 4th generation (680 mm ⁇ 880 mm or 730 mm ⁇ 920 mm
- the 5th generation (1100 mm ⁇ 1300 mm
- an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film is preferably formed between the formation substrate 101 and the peeling layer 103 , in which case contamination from the glass substrate can be prevented.
- the peeling layer 103 can be formed using an element selected from tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), titanium, tantalum, niobium, nickel, cobalt, zirconium, zinc, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, and silicon; an alloy material containing any of the elements; a compound material containing any of the elements; or the like.
- a crystal structure of a layer containing silicon may be amorphous, microcrystal, or polycrystal.
- a metal oxide such as aluminum oxide, gallium oxide, zinc oxide, titanium dioxide, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, or an In—Ga—Zn oxide can be used.
- the peeling layer 103 is preferably formed using a high melting point metal material such as tungsten, titanium, or molybdenum, in which case the degree of freedom of the process for forming the layer to be peeled 105 can be increased.
- the peeling layer 103 can be formed by, for example, a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method (e.g., a plasma CVD method, a thermal CVD method, or a metal organic CVD (MOCVD) method), an atomic layer deposition (ALD) method, a coating method (e.g., a spin coating method, a droplet discharge method, or a dispensing method), a printing method, or an evaporation method.
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- MOCVD metal organic CVD
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- a coating method e.g., a spin coating method, a droplet discharge method, or a dispensing method
- a printing method e.
- a tungsten film, a molybdenum film, or a film containing a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed.
- a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum may be formed.
- the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is, for example, an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum.
- the adhesion between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled formed later can be controlled by changing the state of a surface of the tungsten film.
- the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, nitrous oxide (N 2 O) plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the film containing tungsten.
- Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas.
- a tungsten film with a thickness of less than 10 nm is used. This enables peeling to be performed easily with a small amount of peeling force; thus, the above plasma treatment or heat treatment does not need to be performed. This can simplify a peeling process and a fabrication process of a device, which is preferable.
- a layer formed as the layer to be peeled 105 there is no particular limitation on a layer formed as the layer to be peeled 105 .
- an insulating layer in contact with the peeling layer 103 is formed on the peeling layer 103 as the layer to be peeled 105 .
- a functional element may be formed over the insulating layer.
- the description in Embodiment 2 can also be referred to.
- the insulating layer over the peeling layer 103 preferably has a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride oxide film, and the like.
- the insulating layer can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, a coating method, a printing method, an evaporation method, or the like.
- the insulating layer is formed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. by a plasma CVD method, whereby the insulating layer can be a dense film having an excellent gas barrier property.
- the thickness of the insulating layer is preferably greater than or equal to 10 nm and less than or equal to 3000 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 1500 nm.
- FIG. 1B corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line A1-A2 in FIG. 1C .
- FIG. 1C is a plan view viewed from the substrate 109 side. Note that the substrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view.
- the bonding layer 107 is provided so that it is overlapped by the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 . As illustrated in FIGS. 1B and 1C , it is preferable that an end portion of the bonding layer 107 be not more on the outside than an end portion of the peeling layer 103 .
- FIG. 2A illustrates another structure example.
- FIG. 2A is a plan view viewed from the substrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line B1-B2 in the plan view. Note that the substrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view.
- the formation substrate 101 is attached to the substrate 109 with the bonding layer 107 in a region where the formation substrate 101 and the peeling layer 103 do not overlap each other and the substrate 109 and the peeling layer 103 do not overlap each other like a region surrounded by a dotted line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 2A , failure of peeling is likely to occur depending on the area of the region and the degree of adhesion between the bonding layer 107 and a layer in contact with the bonding layer 107 .
- the bonding layer 107 be more on the inside than the peeling layer 103 ( FIGS. 1B and 1C ) or the end portion of the bonding layer 107 and the end portion of the peeling layer 103 be aligned with each other.
- the bonding layer 107 is preferably formed using a sheet-like adhesive (adhesive sheet) or a low-fluidity material, in which case the bonding layer 107 does not spread or is less likely to spread outside the peeling layer 103 .
- FIG. 2B is a plan view viewed from the substrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line C1-C2 in the plan view. Note that the substrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view. As illustrated in FIG. 2B , it is preferable to provide a frame-shaped bonding layer 111 over the layer to be peeled 105 or the peeling layer 103 and to form the bonding layer 107 in a region surrounded by the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 . This can prevent the bonding layer 107 from spreading outside the peeling layer 103 and the yield of a peeling process from being decreased.
- the structure illustrated in FIG. 2B is preferably employed, in which case a liquid adhesive can be used for the bonding layer and the range of materials for the bonding layer can be expanded.
- an end portion of the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 be more on the inside than the end portion of the peeling layer 103 . This enables the end portion of the bonding layer 107 to be also more on the inside than the end portion of the peeling layer 103 . Note that the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 and the end portion of the peeling layer 103 may overlap each other.
- the formation order of the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 and the bonding layer 107 is not limited.
- the bonding layer 107 may be formed by a screen printing method or the like, and then the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 may be foamed by a coating method or the like.
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 may be formed by a coating method or the like, and then the bonding layer 107 may be formed using an apparatus for a one drop fill (ODF) method or the like.
- ODF one drop fill
- a resin layer 113 may be provided outside the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 or the bonding layer 107 .
- FIG. 2C is a plan view viewed from the substrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line D1-D2 in the plan view. Note that the substrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view.
- the resin layer 113 can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the layer to be peeled 105 even when the device under manufacture is exposed to an air atmosphere during the fabrication process.
- the layer to be peeled 105 and the substrate 109 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere.
- a variety of curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used.
- these adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin.
- a material with low moisture permeability, such as an epoxy resin, is particularly preferable.
- a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used.
- a sheet-like adhesive may be used.
- the resin may include a drying agent.
- a drying agent for example, a substance that adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used.
- a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used.
- the drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can suppress deterioration of the functional element due to entry of moisture in the air and can improve the reliability of the device.
- a filler with a high refractive index or light-scattering member into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved.
- a filler with a high refractive index or light-scattering member into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved.
- titanium oxide, barium oxide, zeolite, zirconium, or the like can be used.
- an adhesive with which the substrate 109 and the layer to be peeled 105 can be chemically or physically separated when necessary such as an adhesive that is soluble in water or a solvent or an adhesive that is capable of being plasticized upon irradiation of UV light, can be used for the bonding layer 107 .
- an adhesive that is soluble in water or a solvent or an adhesive that is capable of being plasticized upon irradiation of UV light can be used for the bonding layer 107 .
- a water-soluble resin may be used.
- the substrate 109 a variety of substrates that can be used as the formation substrate 101 can be used. Alternatively, a film-like flexible substrate may be used.
- Materials that can be used for the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 and the resin layer 113 are the same as the material that can be used for the bonding layer 107 .
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 may be in any of a cured state, a semi-cured state, and uncured state as long as the bonding layer 107 can be prevented from spreading outside the peeling layer 103 .
- a peeling trigger which is described later, is preferably formed in a region overlapping the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 . This enables the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 together with the bonding layer 107 to be used as a layer for sealing the layer to be peeled 105 after peeling, which prevents deterioration of the functional element due to entry of moisture in the air. Thus, a highly reliable device can be fabricated.
- an end portion of the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 be not more on the outside than the end portion of the peeling layer 103 in order to prevent a decrease in the yield of the peeling process.
- the peeling layer with too large thickness has a low light-transmitting property as in the case of using a metal film such as a tungsten film; thus, light for curing a photocurable resin hardly passes through the peeling layer. This causes a problem in that, for example, a photocurable resin is not cured or it takes a long time to cure a photocurable resin.
- the peeling layer with a small thickness of less than 10 nm is used in one embodiment of the present invention, the following advantages are obtained: the bonding layer can be reliably cured or the bonding layer can be cured in a short time, and a wide range of materials can be used for the peeling layer.
- the yield of a subsequent peeling process might be decreased because of the degree of adhesion between the formation substrate 101 and the substrate 109 .
- at least part of the resin layer 113 is preferably in a semi-cured state or an uncured state.
- a photocurable resin is used for the resin layer 113 and is partly irradiated with light, so that part of the resin layer 113 is cured.
- Part of the resin layer 113 is preferably cured, in which case the gap between the formation substrate 101 and the substrate 109 and the positions thereof can remain unchanged even when the device under manufacture is moved from a reduced-pressure atmosphere to the air atmosphere during the process.
- a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation ( FIGS. 1B and 1D ).
- Laser light irradiation is preferably employed, in which case the substrate does not need to be, for example, cut to form a peeling trigger and generation of dust or the like can be prevented.
- a region where the cured bonding layer 107 , the layer to be peeled 105 , and the peeling layer 103 overlap each other is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P1 in FIG. 1B ).
- a region where the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 , the layer to be peeled 105 , and the peeling layer 103 overlap each other is preferably irradiated with laser light.
- laser light irradiation may be performed from either substrate side, it is preferable to perform laser light irradiation from the formation substrate 101 side on which the peeling layer 103 is provided so that irradiation of the functional element or the like with scattered light can be suppressed. Note that a material that transmits the laser light is used for the substrate on the side where laser light irradiation is performed.
- Part of the first layer (a layer that is included in the layer to be peeled 105 and is in contact with the peeling layer 103 ) can be removed and the peeling trigger (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 1D ) can be formed by cracking at least part of the first layer or causing film breakage.
- the peeling trigger see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 1D .
- the peeling trigger can be formed by cracking at least part of the first layer or causing film breakage.
- the peeling trigger see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 1D .
- the force of separating the layer to be peeled 105 and the peeling layer 103 is preferably concentrated at the peeling trigger; thus, it is preferable to form the peeling trigger not at the center portion of the bonding layer 107 in a cured state but in the vicinity of the end portion of the bonding layer 107 . It is particularly preferable to form the peeling trigger in the vicinity of the corner portion compared to the vicinity of the side portion among the vicinities of the end portion.
- the peeling trigger is preferably formed in the form of a solid line or a dashed line by continuously or intermittently irradiating the vicinity of the end portion of the bonding layer 107 with laser light, in which case peeling is performed easily.
- a laser used to form a peeling trigger there is no particular limitation on a laser used to form a peeling trigger.
- a continuous wave laser or a pulsed oscillation laser can be used.
- the conditions for laser light irradiation such as frequency, power density, energy density, and beam profile are controlled as appropriate in consideration of the thicknesses, the materials, or the like of the formation substrate 101 and the peeling layer 103 .
- the layer to be peeled 105 and the formation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger ( FIGS. 1E and 1F ).
- the layer to be peeled 105 can be transferred from the formation substrate 101 to the substrate 109 .
- one of the substrates is preferably fixed to a suction stage or the like.
- the formation substrate 101 may be fixed to the suction stage to peel the layer to be peeled 105 from the formation substrate 101 .
- the substrate 109 may be fixed to a suction stage to peel the formation substrate 101 from the substrate 109 .
- the bonding layer 107 that is more on the outside than the peeling trigger remains on at least one of the formation substrate 101 and the substrate 109 .
- FIGS. 1E and 1F illustrate an example in which the bonding layer 107 remains on both substrates, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example.
- the layer to be peeled 105 and the formation substrate 101 may be separated by mechanical force (a peeling process with a human hand or a gripper, a peeling process by rotation of a roller, or the like) from the peeling trigger.
- mechanical force a peeling process with a human hand or a gripper, a peeling process by rotation of a roller, or the like
- the formation substrate 101 and the layer to be peeled 105 may be separated by filling the interface between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 with liquid such as water.
- a portion between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 absorbs a liquid through capillarity action, so that the peeling layer 103 can be separated easily.
- an adverse effect on the functional element included in the layer to be peeled 105 due to static electricity caused at the time of peeling e.g., a phenomenon in which a semiconductor element is damaged by static electricity
- liquid can be sprayed in the faun of mist or steam.
- the liquid pure water, an organic solvent, a neutral, alkaline, or acid aqueous solution, an aqueous solution in which a salt is dissolved, or the like can be used.
- the bonding layer 107 , the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 , the resin layer 113 , and the like that remain on the substrate 109 and does not contribute to attachment of the layer to be peeled 105 and the substrate 109 may be removed.
- Such removal is preferable because an adverse effect on the functional element in a subsequent step (e.g., entry of impurities) can be suppressed.
- An unnecessary resin can be removed by, for example, wiping or cleaning.
- peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation and then the interface between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 is made in a state where peeling is easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- the peeling layer 103 with a thickness of less than 10 nm is formed over the formation substrate 101 , and the layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer 103 ( FIG. 1A ). Then, the layer to be peeled 105 is attached to the substrate 109 with the bonding layer 107 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 , and the bonding layer 107 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 are cured ( FIG. 3A ).
- a peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife such as a cutter knife ( FIGS. 3A and 3B ).
- a cut may be made in the substrate 109 , the bonding layer 107 or the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 , and the layer to be peeled 105 (see arrows P2 in FIG. 3A ).
- This enables parts of the first layer to be removed to form peeling triggers (see regions surrounded by dotted lines in FIG. 3B ).
- the peeling trigger in the form of a solid line is formed by making a cut in a region where the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 in a cured state and the peeling layer 103 overlap each other; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to such an example. Note that a cut may be made in the peeling layer 103 .
- the layer to be peeled 105 and the formation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger ( FIGS. 3C and 3D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 105 to be transferred from the formation substrate 101 to the substrate 109 .
- peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is faulted by a sharp knife or the like and then the interface between the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed.
- This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- the layer to be peeled 105 can be double sealed by the bonding layer 107 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 111 . Therefore, even when an organic EL element or the like that is likely to deteriorate due to moisture or the like is formed in the layer to be peeled 105 , a highly reliable light-emitting device can be fabricated.
- a peeling layer 203 with a thickness of less than 10 nm is formed over a formation substrate 201 , and a layer to be peeled 205 is formed over the peeling layer 203 ( FIG. 4A ).
- a peeling layer 223 is formed over a formation substrate 221 , and a layer to be peeled 225 is formed over the peeling layer 223 ( FIG. 4B ).
- the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 are attached to each other with a bonding layer 207 and a frame-shaped bonding layer 211 so that surfaces on which the layers to be peeled are formed face each other, and then the bonding layer 207 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 are cured ( FIG. 4C ).
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 and the bonding layer 207 that is more on the inside than the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 are provided over the layer to be peeled 225 , and then the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 are made to face each other and attached to each other.
- the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere.
- FIG. 4C illustrates the case where the peeling layer 203 and the peeling layer 223 have different sizes
- the peeling layers may have the same size as illustrated in FIG. 4D .
- the bonding layer 207 is positioned so as to be overlapped by the peeling layer 203 and the layer to be peeled 205 and to overlap the layer to be peeled 225 and the peeling layer 223 . Then, an end portion of the bonding layer 207 is preferably more on the inside than at least an end portion of either the peeling layer 203 or the peeling layer 223 (the peeling layer that is desirably peeled first). This can prevent strong adhesion between the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 ; thus, a decrease in the yield of a subsequent peeling process can be suppressed.
- a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation ( FIGS. 5A and 5B ).
- Either the formation substrate 201 or the formation substrate 221 may be peeled first.
- a substrate over which a larger peeling layer is formed may be peeled first or a substrate over which a smaller peeling layer is formed may be peeled first.
- an element such as a semiconductor element, a light-emitting element, or a display element is formed only over one of the substrates
- the substrate on the side where the element is formed may be peeled first or the other substrate may be peeled first.
- an example in which the formation substrate 201 is peeled first is described.
- a region where the bonding layer 207 in a cured state or the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 in a cured state, the layer to be peeled 205 , and the peeling layer 203 overlap one another is irradiated with laser light. Described here as an example is the case where the bonding layer 207 is in a cured state and the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 is not in a cured state, and the bonding layer 207 in a cured state is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P3 in FIG. 5A ).
- Part of the first layer is removed, so that a peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 5B ).
- a peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 5B ).
- the first layer but also the peeling layer 203 , the bonding layer 207 , or another layer included in the layer to be peeled 205 may be partly removed.
- the formation substrate 201 and the peeling layer 203 can be selectively separated by cracking only the layer to be peeled 205 and not the layer to be peeled 225 (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 5B ).
- a peeling trigger can be prevented from being formed in both the peeling layer 203 and the peeling layer 223 by irradiating a region that is overlapped by the peeling layer 203 and does not overlap the peeling layer 223 with laser light ( FIGS. 8B and 8C ).
- This can ease restriction on the laser light irradiation conditions, which is preferable.
- laser light irradiation may be performed from either substrate side in that case, it is preferable to perform laser irradiation from the formation substrate 201 side where the peeling layer 203 is provided so that irradiation of the functional element or the like with scattered light can be prevented.
- the layer to be peeled 205 and the formation substrate 201 are separated from the formed peeling trigger ( FIGS. 5C and 5D ).
- This enables the layer to be peeled 205 to be transferred from the formation substrate 201 to the formation substrate 221 .
- the bonding layer 207 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 that are formed more on the outside than the peeling trigger remain on at least one of the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 .
- FIGS. 5C and 5D illustrate an example in which the bonding layer 207 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 211 remain on both sides, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example.
- the exposed layer to be peeled 205 is attached to a substrate 231 with a bonding layer 233 , and the bonding layer 233 is cured ( FIG. 6A ).
- a frame-shaped bonding layer 235 and the bonding layer 233 surrounded by the frame-shaped bonding layer 235 are provided over the layer to be peeled 225 , and then the layer to be peeled 225 and the flexible substrate 231 are attached to each other.
- the layer to be peeled 205 and the substrate 231 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere.
- a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation ( FIGS. 6B and 6C ).
- the bonding layer 233 is in a cured state and the frame-shaped bonding layer 235 is not in a cured state, and the bonding layer 233 in a cured state is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P4 in FIG. 6B ).
- Part of the first layer is removed, so that a peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 6C ).
- the bonding layer 233 or another layer included in the layer to be peeled 225 may be partly removed.
- laser light irradiation be performed from the formation substrate 221 side where the peeling layer 223 is provided.
- the layer to be peeled 225 and the formation substrate 221 are separated from the formed peeling trigger ( FIG. 6D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 205 and the layer to be peeled 225 to be transferred to the substrate 231 .
- peeling is performed after the following steps: the pair of formation substrates each provided with the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled are attached to each other, the peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation, and then the interface between each peeling layer and each layer to be peeled is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- attachment of a substrate included in a device that is desirably fabricated can be performed after the following steps: a pair of formation substrates each provided with a layer to be peeled are attached to each other, and peeling is performed.
- formation substrates having low flexibility can be used for attaching the layers to be peeled to each other.
- the alignment accuracy at the time of attachment can be improved as compared to the case where flexible substrates are attached to each other.
- peeling Method 4 steps up to the first peeling process are the same as those in Peeling Method 3. Steps after the step in FIG. 5D is described below in detail.
- the layer to be peeled 205 that is peeled from the formation substrate 201 in the step illustrated in FIG. 5D is attached to the substrate 231 with the bonding layer 233 , and the bonding layer 233 is cured ( FIG. 7A ).
- a peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife such as a cutter knife (FIGS. 7 B and 7 C).
- the substrate 231 on the side where the peeling layer 223 is not provided can be cut by a sharp knife or the like, the cut may be made in the substrate 231 , the bonding layer 233 , and the layer to be peeled 225 (see arrows P5 in FIG. 7B ). This enables part of the first layer to be removed; thus, the peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 7C ).
- the yield of a subsequent peeling process might be decreased depending on the degree of adhesion between the formation substrate 221 and the substrate 231 .
- the layer to be peeled 225 and the formation substrate 221 are separated from the formed peeling trigger ( FIG. 7D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 225 to be transferred from the formation substrate 221 to the substrate 231 .
- peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife or the like and then the interface between the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- Bonding of a substrate over which a device that is desirably fabricated can be performed after the following steps: a pair of formation substrates each provided with a layer to be peeled are attached to each other and then peeling is performed.
- formation substrates having low flexibility can be used for attaching the layers to be peeled to each other.
- the alignment accuracy at the time of attachment can be improved as compared to the case where flexible substrates are attached to each other.
- an end portion of a region that can be peeled and transferred is more on the inside than the end portion of the peeling layer 103 .
- the peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 are formed so that an end portion of the layer to be peeled 105 is more on the inside than an end portion of the peeling layer 103 as illustrated in FIGS. 9A to 9C .
- the peeling layer 103 may be provided for each of the layers to be peeled 105 as illustrated in FIG. 9B , or a plurality of layers to be peeled 105 may be provided over one peeling layer 103 as illustrated in FIG. 9C .
- any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention enables a layer to be peeled to be peeled with a small amount of force and the layer to be peeled to be prevented from being cracked when peeled regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
- a decrease in the yield of the peeling process can be suppressed.
- FIGS. 10A to 10C a flexible light-emitting device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 10A to 10C , FIGS. 11A to 11C , FIGS. 12 A 1 , 12 A 2 , 12 B, and 12 C, FIGS. 13A and 13B , and FIGS. 14 A 1 , 14 A 2 , 14 B, and 14 C.
- FIGS. 10A to 10C , FIGS. 11A to 11C , FIGS. 12 A 1 , 12 A 2 , 12 B, and 12 C, FIGS. 13A and 13B , and FIGS. 14 A 1 , 14 A 2 , 14 B, and 14 C illustrate examples of flexible light-emitting devices each including an organic EL element as a light-emitting element.
- the flexible light-emitting devices of embodiments of the present invention can be bent with a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm.
- the direction in which the light-emitting device is bent is not limited.
- the number of bent portions may be one or more than one.
- the light-emitting device can be folded in two or three.
- a light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes, for example, a first flexible substrate, a second flexible substrate, a light-emitting element between the first flexible substrate and the second flexible substrate, a first insulating layer between the first flexible substrate and the light-emitting element, and a first bonding layer between the second flexible substrate and the light-emitting element.
- the light-emitting element includes a layer containing a light-emitting organic compound between a pair of electrodes.
- the water vapor transmission rate of the first insulating layer is less than 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 g/m 2 ⁇ day.
- a second insulating layer be provided between the second flexible substrate and the first bonding layer and the water vapor transmission rate of the second insulating layer be less than 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 g/m 2 ⁇ day.
- the light-emitting device in this specification includes, in its category, a display device using a light-emitting element.
- the category of the light-emitting device in this specification includes a module in which a light-emitting element is provided with a connector such as an anisotropic conductive film or a tape carrier package (TCP); a module having a TCP at the tip of which a printed wiring board is provided; and a module in which an integrated circuit (IC) is directly mounted on a light-emitting element by a chip on glass (COG) method.
- TCP anisotropic conductive film or a tape carrier package
- COG chip on glass
- the category also includes light-emitting devices used in lighting equipment and the like.
- FIG. 10A is a plan view of a light-emitting device
- FIGS. 10B and 10C are each an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X1-Y1 in FIG. 10A .
- the light-emitting devices illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10C are bottom-emission light-emitting devices.
- the light-emitting devices in FIGS. 10B and 10C each include a flexible substrate 419 , an adhesive layer 422 , an insulating layer 424 , a conductive layer 406 , a conductive layer 416 , an insulating layer 405 , an organic EL element 450 (a first electrode 401 , an EL layer 402 , and a second electrode 403 ), a bonding layer 407 , and a flexible substrate 428 .
- the first electrode 401 , the insulating layer 424 , the adhesive layer 422 , and the flexible substrate 419 transmit visible light.
- the organic EL element 450 is provided over the flexible substrate 419 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 is sealed by the flexible substrate 419 , the bonding layer 407 , and the flexible substrate 428 .
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 . It is preferable that the second electrode 403 reflect visible light.
- the conductive layer 406 is electrically connected to the first electrode 401
- the conductive layer 416 is electrically connected to the second electrode 403 .
- the conductive layer 406 covered with the insulating layer 405 with the first electrode 401 therebetween functions as an auxiliary wiring and is electrically connected to the first electrode 401 .
- the auxiliary wiring be electrically connected to the electrode of the organic EL element, in which case a voltage drop due to the electrical resistance of the electrode can be inhibited.
- the conductive layer 406 may be provided over the first electrode 401 .
- an auxiliary wiring that is electrically connected to the second electrode 403 may be provided, for example, over the insulating layer 405 .
- a light outcoupling structure is preferably provided on the side from which light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted.
- FIG. 10B illustrates an example in which the flexible substrate 419 from which the light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted also serves as the light outcoupling structure.
- a touch sensor or the light outcoupling structure such as a sheet having a function of diffusing light may be provided so as to be overlapped by the flexible substrate.
- a polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be provided.
- FIG. 10C illustrates a case where a diffusion plate 411 and a touch sensor 413 are provided so as to be overlapped by the flexible substrate 419 .
- a touch sensor or the like can be provided also in each structure described below.
- the insulating layer 424 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent moisture and oxygen from entering the light-emitting device from the flexible substrate 419 side.
- the gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the layer having an excellent gas barrier property is, for example, less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 7 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 [g/m 2 ⁇ day].
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 1 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 1 or Peeling Method 2 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 is formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulating layer 424 can be formed at a high temperature.
- the organic EL element 450 or the like as well as the insulating layer 424 may be formed as a layer to be peeled.
- FIG. 11A is a plan view of a light-emitting device
- FIGS. 11B and 11C are each an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X2-Y2 in FIG. 11A .
- the light-emitting devices illustrated in FIGS. 11A to 11C are top-emission light-emitting devices.
- the light-emitting devices in FIGS. 11B and 11C each include a flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , a conductive layer 408 , the insulating layer 405 , the organic EL element 450 (the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 , and the second electrode 403 ), a conductive layer 410 , a frame-shaped bonding layer 404 , the bonding layer 407 , the flexible substrate 428 , and a light outcoupling structure 409 .
- the second electrode 403 , the bonding layer 407 , the flexible substrate 428 , and the light outcoupling structure 409 transmit visible light.
- the organic EL element 450 is provided over the flexible substrate 420 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 is sealed by the flexible substrate 420 , the bonding layer 407 , the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 , and the flexible substrate 428 .
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 . It is preferable that the first electrode 401 reflect visible light.
- the light outcoupling structure 409 is attached to a surface of the flexible substrate 428 .
- the conductive layer 410 can be formed using the same process and material as those of the first electrode 401 and is electrically connected to the second electrode 403 .
- the conductive layer 408 over the insulating layer 405 functions as an auxiliary wiring and is electrically connected to the second electrode 403 .
- the conductive layer 408 is provided over the second electrode 403 .
- an auxiliary wiring that is electrically connected to the first electrode 401 may be provided.
- the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the light-emitting element sealed by the pair of flexible substrates and the bonding layers.
- the bonding layer is not covered at a side surface of the light-emitting device. For this reason, impurities such as moisture and oxygen enter the organic EL element from the outside when the bonding layer has a poor gas barrier property.
- the entry of impurities into the organic EL element causes, for example, shrinkage of a light-emitting portion (here, luminance degradation from an end portion of the light-emitting portion or an increase in a non-light-emitting region in the light-emitting portion).
- the bonding layer that covers the organic EL element preferably has an excellent gas barrier property (in particular, low water vapor and oxygen transmission rates).
- a reduction in the volume due to curing of a material used for the bonding layer is preferably as small as possible.
- the light-transmitting property of the bonding layer is preferably high so that the light outcoupling efficiency of the light-emitting device is increased.
- the refractive index of the bonding layer is preferably high.
- the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes two or more kinds of bonding layers between a flexible substrate and an organic EL element.
- one bonding layer having a more excellent gas barrier property than the other bonding layer surrounds the other.
- a material of the outer bonding layer has a more excellent gas barrier property than a material of the inner bonding layer.
- a high light-transmitting property particularly, visible light transmittance
- a high refractive index is used for the inner bonding layer, for example, moisture and oxygen can be prevented from entering the light-emitting device from the outside.
- a highly reliable light-emitting device in which shrinkage of a light-emitting portion is suppressed can be obtained.
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 2 includes the bonding layer 407 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 surrounding the bonding layer 407 , between the flexible substrate 428 and the organic EL element 450 .
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 preferably has a more excellent gas barrier property than the bonding layer 407 .
- the gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 is, for example, less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 7 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 [g/m 2 ⁇ day].
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the volume of the bonding layer 407 is preferably less reduced by curing than that of the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 and the bonding layer 407 may be in contact with the flexible substrate 428 as illustrated in FIG. 11B , or the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 is not necessarily in contact with the flexible substrate 428 as illustrated in FIG. 11C .
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 may be positioned in an end portion of the light-emitting device as illustrated in FIG. 11B , or the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 and the bonding layer 407 may be positioned in the end portion of the light-emitting device as illustrated in FIG. 11C .
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 2 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 1 or Peeling Method 2 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 is formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulating layer 424 can be formed at a high temperature.
- the light-emitting device can have high reliability.
- the organic EL element 450 or the like as well as the insulating layer 424 may be formed as a layer to be peeled.
- FIG. 12 A 1 is a plan view of a light-emitting device
- FIG. 12B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X3-Y3 in FIG. 12 A 1 .
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12B is a top-emission light-emitting device using a separate coloring method.
- the light-emitting device can have a structure in which light-emitting units of three colors of, for example, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) express one color, a structure in which light-emitting units of four colors of R, G, B, and white (W) express one color, or the like.
- the color element is not particularly limited and colors other than R, G, B, and W may be used. For example, yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like may be used.
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12 A 1 includes a light-emitting portion 491 , a driver circuit portion 493 , and a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 495 .
- An organic EL element and a transistor included in the light-emitting portion 491 and the driver circuit portion 493 are sealed by the flexible substrate 420 , the flexible substrate 428 , the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 , and the bonding layer 407 .
- FIG. 12B illustrates an example in which the conductive layer 457 and a connector 497 are connected to each other through an opening in the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12B includes the flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , a transistor 455 , an insulating layer 463 , an insulating layer 465 , the insulating layer 405 , the organic EL element 450 (the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 , and the second electrode 403 ), the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 , the bonding layer 407 , the flexible substrate 428 , and the conductive layer 457 .
- the flexible substrate 428 , the bonding layer 407 , and the second electrode 403 transmit visible light.
- the transistor 455 and the organic EL element 450 are provided over the flexible substrate 420 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 over the insulating layer 465 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 .
- the first electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor 455 . It is preferable that the first electrode 401 reflect visible light.
- the end portion of the first electrode 401 is covered with the insulating layer 405 .
- the driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.
- FIG. 12B illustrates one of the transistors in the driver circuit portion 493 .
- the conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal (e.g., a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, and a reset signal) or a potential from the outside is transmitted to the driver circuit portion 493 .
- a signal e.g., a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, and a reset signal
- the FPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal.
- the conductive layer 457 is preferably formed using the same material and step as those of the electrode or the wiring in the light-emitting portion or the driver circuit portion.
- the conductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in the transistor.
- the insulating layer 463 has an effect of suppressing diffusion of impurities into a semiconductor included in the transistor.
- an insulating layer having a planarization function is preferably selected in order to reduce surface unevenness due to the transistor.
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 preferably has a more excellent gas barrier property than the bonding layer 407 to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from the outside into the light-emitting device.
- the light-emitting device can be highly reliable.
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 .
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 3 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 1 or Peeling Method 2 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 and the transistor are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulating layer 424 and the transistor can be formed at a high temperature.
- the organic EL element 450 or the like may be further formed as a layer to be peeled.
- FIG. 12 A 2 is a plan view of the light-emitting device
- FIG. 12C is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X4-Y4 in FIG. 12 A 2
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12C is a bottom-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method.
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12C includes the flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , a transistor 454 , the transistor 455 , the insulating layer 463 , a coloring layer 432 , the insulating layer 465 , a conductive layer 435 , an insulating layer 467 , the insulating layer 405 , the organic EL element 450 (the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 , and the second electrode 403 ), the bonding layer 407 , the flexible substrate 428 , and a conductive layer 457 .
- the flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , the insulating layer 463 , the insulating layer 465 , the insulating layer 467 , and the first electrode 401 transmit visible light.
- the switching transistor 454 , the current control transistor 455 , and the organic EL element 450 are provided over the flexible substrate 420 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 over the insulating layer 467 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 .
- the first electrode 401 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor 455 through the conductive layer 435 .
- the end portion of the first electrode 401 is covered with the insulating layer 405 . It is preferable that the second electrode 403 reflect visible light.
- the light-emitting device includes the coloring layer 432 overlapped by the organic EL element 450 over the insulating layer 463 .
- the driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.
- FIG. 12C illustrates two of the transistors in the driver circuit portion 493 .
- the conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to the driver circuit portion 493 .
- an example in which the FPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described.
- the conductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the conductive layer 435 is described.
- the insulating layer 463 has an effect of suppressing diffusion of impurities into a semiconductor included in the transistor.
- an insulating layer having a planarization function is preferably selected in order to reduce surface unevenness due to the transistors and wirings.
- a touch sensor may be provided so as to be overlapped by the flexible substrate 420 as illustrated in FIG. 13A .
- the touch sensor includes a conductive layer 441 , a conductive layer 442 , and an insulating layer 443 .
- a flexible substrate 444 may be provided between the flexible substrate 420 and the touch sensor.
- the touch sensor may be provided between the flexible substrate 420 and the flexible substrate 444 .
- An FPC 445 for the touch sensor may also be provided.
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 4 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 1 or Peeling Method 2 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 and the transistors are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulating layer 424 and the transistors can be formed at a high temperature.
- the organic EL element 450 or the like may be further formed as a layer to be peeled.
- FIG. 14 A 1 is a plan view of a light-emitting device
- FIG. 14B is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X5-Y5 in FIG. 14 A 1 .
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14 A 1 is a top-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method.
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14B includes the flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , the transistor 455 , the insulating layer 463 , the insulating layer 465 , the insulating layer 405 , a spacer 496 , the organic EL element 450 (the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 , and the second electrode 403 ), the bonding layer 407 , an overcoat 453 , a light-blocking layer 431 , the coloring layer 432 , an insulating layer 226 , an adhesive layer 426 , the flexible substrate 428 , and a conductive layer 457 .
- the flexible substrate 428 , the adhesive layer 426 , the insulating layer 226 , the bonding layer 407 , the overcoat 453 , and the second electrode 403 transmit visible light.
- the transistor 455 and the organic EL element 450 are provided over the flexible substrate 420 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 over the insulating layer 465 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 .
- the first electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor 455 .
- the end portion of the first electrode 401 is covered with the insulating layer 405 . It is preferable that the first electrode 401 reflect visible light.
- the spacer 496 is provided over the insulating layer 405 . The spacer 496 can adjust the gap between the flexible substrates 420 and 428 .
- the light-emitting device includes the coloring layer 432 that overlaps the organic EL element 450 with the bonding layer 407 therebetween, and the light-blocking layer 431 that overlaps the insulating layer 405 with the bonding layer 407 therebetween.
- the driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.
- FIG. 14B illustrates one of the transistors in the driver circuit portion 493 .
- the conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to the driver circuit portion 493 .
- an example in which the FPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described.
- the conductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in the transistor 455 is described.
- the FPC 495 overlaps the flexible substrate 428 .
- the connector 497 is connected to the conductive layer 457 through an opening in the flexible substrate 428 , the adhesive layer 426 , the insulating layer 226 , the bonding layer 407 , the insulating layer 465 , and the insulating layer 463 .
- the connector 497 is connected to the FPC 495 .
- the FPC 495 and the conductive layer 457 are electrically connected to each other through the connector 497 .
- the conductive layer 457 In the case where the flexible substrate 428 overlaps the conductive layer 457 , the conductive layer 457 , the connector 497 , and the FPC 495 can be electrically connected to one another by forming an opening in the flexible substrate 428 (or using a flexible substrate having an opening).
- the insulating layer 424 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from the flexible substrate 420 side into the light-emitting device.
- the insulating layer 226 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from the flexible substrate 428 side into the light-emitting device.
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 5 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 3 or Peeling Method 4 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 , the transistors, the organic EL element 450 , and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate.
- the insulating layer 226 , the coloring layer 432 , the light-blocking layer 431 , and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled.
- the layer to be peeled and the formation substrate are separated and the layer to be peeled and a flexible substrate are attached to each other with the adhesive layer, so that the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 5 can be fabricated.
- an insulating layer and a transistor can be formed over a formation substrate at a high temperature.
- the insulating layer 424 , the insulating layer 226 , and the transistor that are formed at a high temperature the light-emitting device can be highly reliable.
- the insulating layers (the insulating layers 226 and 424 ) having high gas barrier properties, which are formed at a high temperature, can be positioned above and below the organic EL element 450 . This can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the organic EL element 450 .
- FIG. 14 A 2 is a plan view of a light-emitting device
- FIG. 14C is cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X6-Y6 in FIG. 14 A 2 .
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14 A 2 is a top-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method.
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14C includes the flexible substrate 420 , the adhesive layer 422 , the insulating layer 424 , the transistor 455 , the insulating layer 463 , the insulating layer 465 , the insulating layer 405 , the organic EL element 450 (the first electrode 401 , the EL layer 402 , and the second electrode 403 ), a frame-shaped bonding layer 404 a , a frame-shaped bonding layer 404 b , the bonding layer 407 , the overcoat 453 , the light-blocking layer 431 , the coloring layer 432 , the insulating layer 226 , the adhesive layer 426 , the flexible substrate 428 , and the conductive layer 457 .
- the flexible substrate 428 , the adhesive layer 426 , the insulating layer 226 , the bonding layer 407 , the overcoat 453 , and the second electrode 403 transmit visible light.
- the transistor 455 and the organic EL element 450 are provided over the flexible substrate 420 with the adhesive layer 422 and the insulating layer 424 therebetween.
- the organic EL element 450 includes the first electrode 401 over the insulating layer 465 , the EL layer 402 over the first electrode 401 , and the second electrode 403 over the EL layer 402 .
- the first electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor 455 .
- the end portion of the first electrode 401 is covered with the insulating layer 405 . It is preferable that the first electrode 401 reflect visible light.
- the light-emitting device includes the coloring layer 432 that overlaps the organic EL element 450 with the bonding layer 407 therebetween, and the light-blocking layer 431 that overlaps the insulating layer 405 with the bonding layer 407 therebetween.
- the driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.
- FIG. 14C illustrates one of the transistors in the driver circuit portion 493 .
- An example in which the driver circuit portion 493 is more on the inside than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b is described in this embodiment; however, the driver circuit portion 493 may be more on the outside than one or both of the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b.
- the conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to the driver circuit portion 493 .
- the FPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal.
- the conductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in the transistor 455 is described.
- the FPC 495 and the flexible substrate 428 do not necessarily overlap each other.
- the connector 497 is connected to the conductive layer 457 .
- the connector 497 is connected to the FPC 495 .
- the FPC 495 and the conductive layer 457 are electrically connected to each other through the connector 497 .
- the conductive layer 457 is preferably more on the outside than the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 a , in which case entry of impurities such as moisture into the organic EL element 450 can be prevented even in the case where moisture and the like easily enter a connection portion between the FPC 495 and the connector 497 and a connection portion between the connector 497 and the conductive layer 457 .
- the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14C is different from that illustrated in FIG. 14B in that the insulating layer 465 is covered at a side surface of the light-emitting device.
- the insulating layer 465 is preferably covered at the side surface of the light-emitting device.
- the frame-shaped bonding layer having an excellent gas barrier property is preferably positioned at the side surface of the light-emitting device to increase the reliability of the light-emitting device.
- the insulating layer 465 is not necessarily covered at an end portion of the light-emitting device depending on the material or the like for the insulating layer 465 , as illustrated in FIG. 14B .
- the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b each preferably have a more excellent gas barrier property than the bonding layer 407 to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen into the light-emitting device through the side surface of the light-emitting device.
- the light-emitting device can be highly reliable.
- the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 a has a lower water vapor transmission rate than the bonding layer 407 and the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 b and a drying agent or the like that adsorbs moisture is included in the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 b , entry of moisture can be prevented by the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 a and moisture passing through the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 a is adsorbed by the frame-shaped bonding layer 404 b . This can particularly prevent entry of moisture into the bonding layer 407 and the organic EL element 450 .
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b .
- the bonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b .
- the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 6 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention.
- Peeling Method 3 or Peeling Method 4 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the insulating layer 424 , each transistor, the organic EL element 450 , and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate.
- the insulating layer 226 , the coloring layer 432 , the light-blocking layer 431 , and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled.
- the two formation substrates are attached to each other, and then the layer to be peeled and the formation substrate are separated and the layer to be peeled and a flexible substrate are attached to each other, so that the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 6 can be fabricated.
- an insulating layer and a transistor can be formed over a formation substrate at a high temperature.
- the insulating layer 424 , the insulating layer 226 , and the transistor that are formed at a high temperature the light-emitting device can be highly reliable.
- the insulating layers (the insulating layer 226 and the insulating layer 424 ) having high gas barrier properties, which are formed at a high temperature, can be positioned above and below the organic EL element 450 . This can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the organic EL element 450 .
- the insulating layer 424 , the insulating layer 226 , and the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the organic EL element 450 through a surface (a display surface) of the light-emitting device, a rear surface (a surface facing the display surface) thereof, and a side surface thereof.
- the light-emitting device can be highly reliable.
- an active matrix method in which an active element (non-linear element) is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.
- an active element not only a transistor but also various active elements can be used.
- a metal insulator metal (MIM), a thin film diode (TFD), or the like can also be used. Since these elements can be formed with a smaller number of fabrication steps, fabrication cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Furthermore, since the size of these elements is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved.
- an active element is not used in a passive matrix method, the number of fabrication steps is small, so that the fabrication cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Furthermore, since an active element is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved, for example.
- a flexible material is used for the flexible substrate.
- an organic resin, a glass material that is thin enough to have flexibility, or the like can be used.
- a material that transmits visible light is used for the substrate of the light-emitting device from which light is extracted.
- a metal substrate or the like may be used in the case where the flexible substrate does not necessarily transmit visible light.
- An organic resin which has a specific gravity smaller than that of glass, is preferably used for the flexible substrate, in which case the light-emitting device can be more lightweight than in the case where glass is used.
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin; a polyamide imide resin, and a polyvinyl chloride resin.
- PET polyethylene terephthalate
- PEN polyethylene naphthalate
- PES polyethersulfone
- a material whose coefficient of thermal expansion is low is preferred, and for example, a polyamide imide resin, a polyimide resin, or PET can be suitably used.
- a substrate in which a fibrous body is impregnated with a resin (also referred to as prepreg) or a substrate whose coefficient of thermal expansion is reduced by mixing an organic resin with an inorganic filler can also be
- a high-strength fiber of an organic compound or an inorganic compound is used as the fibrous body.
- a high-strength fiber is specifically a fiber with a high tensile modulus of elasticity or a fiber with a high Young's modulus.
- Typical examples of a high-strength fiber include a polyvinyl alcohol based fiber, a polyester based fiber, a polyamide based fiber, a polyethylene based fiber, an aramid based fiber, a polyparaphenylene benzobisoxazole fiber, a glass fiber, and a carbon fiber.
- glass fiber using E glass, S glass, D glass, Q glass, or the like can be used. These fibers may be used in a state of a woven fabric or a nonwoven fabric, and a structure in which this fibrous body is impregnated with a resin and the resin is cured may be used as the flexible substrate.
- a structure in which this fibrous body is impregnated with a resin and the resin is cured may be used as the flexible substrate.
- the structure including the fibrous body and the resin is used as the flexible substrate, reliability against bending or breaking due to local pressure can be increased, which is preferable.
- the refractive index of the material having flexibility and a light-transmitting property is preferably high.
- a substrate obtained by dispersing an inorganic filler having a high refractive index into an organic resin can have a higher refractive index than the substrate formed of only the organic resin.
- an inorganic filler having a particle diameter as small as 40 nm or less is preferred, because such a filler can maintain optical transparency.
- the thickness of a metal substrate is preferably greater than or equal to 10 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably greater than or equal to 20 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 50 ⁇ m. Since a metal substrate has high thermal conductivity, heat generated due to light emission of the light-emitting element can be efficiently released.
- metal substrate there is no particular limitation on a material of the metal substrate, but it is preferable to use, for example, aluminum, copper, nickel, a metal alloy such as an aluminum alloy or stainless steel.
- the flexible substrate may have a stacked-layer structure in which a hard coat layer (such as a silicon nitride layer) by which a surface of a light-emitting device is protected from damage, a layer (such as an aramid resin layer) that can disperse pressure, or the like is stacked over a layer of any of the above-mentioned materials. Furthermore, to suppress a decrease in the lifetime of the functional element (in particular, the organic EL element) due to moisture and the like, an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property described later may be included.
- a hard coat layer such as a silicon nitride layer
- a layer such as an aramid resin layer
- an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property described later may be included.
- the flexible substrate may be formed by stacking a plurality of layers.
- a barrier property against water and oxygen can be improved and thus a reliable light-emitting device can be provided.
- a flexible substrate in which a glass layer, an adhesive layer, and an organic resin layer are stacked from the side closer to an organic EL element can be used.
- the thickness of the glass layer is greater than or equal to 20 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 200 ⁇ m, preferably greater than or equal to 25 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 100 ⁇ m. With such a thickness, the glass layer can have both an excellent barrier property against water and oxygen and a high flexibility.
- the thickness of the organic resin layer is greater than or equal to 10 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 200 ⁇ m, preferably greater than or equal to 20 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 50 ⁇ m.
- the substrate that includes such a composite material of a glass material and an organic resin, a highly reliable and flexible light-emitting device can be provided.
- various curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used.
- these adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin.
- a material with low moisture permeability, such as an epoxy resin is preferable.
- a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used.
- an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- the resin may include a drying agent.
- a drying agent for example, a substance that adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used.
- a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used.
- the drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the functional element and can improve the reliability of the light-emitting device.
- a filler with a high refractive index or a light scattering member is mixed into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved.
- a filler with a high refractive index or a light scattering member is mixed into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved.
- titanium oxide, barium oxide, zeolite, zirconium, or the like can be used.
- An insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property is preferably used as the insulating layer 424 and the insulating layer 226 .
- an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property may be formed between the bonding layer 407 and the second electrode 403 .
- a film containing nitrogen and silicon such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film, a film containing nitrogen and aluminum, such as an aluminum nitride film, or the like can be used.
- a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used.
- the gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property is, for example, less than or equal to 1 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 7 [g/m 2 ⁇ day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 [g/m 2 ⁇ day].
- the above transmission rates are preferably satisfied under hot and humid environment (e.g., temperature: 65° C., humidity: 95%).
- inorganic insulating layers can also be used as other insulating layers.
- an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, or an aluminum oxide film
- an organic material such as polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, or a benzocyclobutene-based resin
- a low-dielectric constant material a low-k material
- the insulating layer 465 and the insulating layer 467 may be formed by stacking a plurality of insulating layers.
- the insulating layer 405 is formed using an organic insulating material or an inorganic insulating material.
- the resin for example, a polyimide resin, a polyamide resin, an acrylic resin, a siloxane resin, an epoxy resin, or a phenol resin can be used. It is particularly preferable that the insulating layer 405 be formed to have an inclined side wall with continuous curvature, using a photosensitive resin material.
- a photolithography method e.g., a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a droplet discharging method (e.g., an ink-jet method), a printing method (e.g., a screen printing method or an off-set printing method), or the like may be used.
- a photolithography method e.g., a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a droplet discharging method (e.g., an ink-jet method), a printing method (e.g., a screen printing method or an off-set printing method), or the like may be used.
- the spacer 496 can be formed using an inorganic insulating material, an organic insulating material, a metal material, or the like.
- an inorganic insulating material and the organic insulating material for example, a variety of materials that can be used for the insulating layer can be used.
- the metal material titanium, aluminum, or the like can be used.
- the structure of the transistor used in the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention there is no particular limitation on the structure of the transistor used in the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention.
- a forward staggered transistor or an inverted staggered transistor may be used.
- a top-gate transistor or a bottom-gate transistor may be used.
- a material used for the transistor For example, a transistor in which silicon, germanium, or an oxide semiconductor is used in a channel formation region can be used.
- the crystallinity of a semiconductor and any of an amorphous semiconductor or a semiconductor having crystallinity (a microcrystalline semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, and a semiconductor partly including crystal regions) may be used.
- a semiconductor having crystallinity is preferably used, in which case deterioration of transistor characteristics can be suppressed.
- silicon amorphous silicon, single crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, or the like can be used.
- oxide semiconductor an In—Ga—Zn—O-based metal oxide or the like can be used.
- a base film is preferably provided.
- the base film can be formed with an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure.
- the base film can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the base film is not necessarily provided.
- the insulating layer 424 can serve as a base film of the transistor.
- the structure of the organic EL element used for the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention is not particularly limited.
- the organic EL element may have a top emission structure, a bottom emission structure, or a dual emission structure.
- a conductive film that transmits visible light is used as the electrode through which light is extracted in the organic EL element.
- a conductive film that reflects visible light is preferably used as the electrode through which light is not extracted.
- the conductive film that transmits visible light can be formed using, for example, indium oxide, an indium tin oxide (ITO), an indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium is added.
- ITO indium tin oxide
- a film of a metal material such as gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, or titanium; an alloy containing any of these metal materials; or a nitride of any of these metal materials (e.g., titanium nitride) can be formed thin so as to have a light-transmitting property.
- a stack of any of the above materials can be used as the conductive layer.
- a stacked film of ITO and an alloy of silver and magnesium is preferably used, in which case conductivity can be increased.
- graphene or the like may be used.
- a metal material such as aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, or palladium or an alloy including any of these metal materials can be used.
- Lanthanum, neodymium, germanium, or the like may be added to the metal material or the alloy.
- an alloy containing aluminum such as an alloy of aluminum and titanium, an alloy of aluminum and nickel, or an alloy of aluminum and neodymium; or an alloy containing silver such as an alloy of silver and copper, an alloy of silver, copper, and palladium, or an alloy of silver and magnesium can be used for the conductive film.
- An alloy of silver and copper is preferable because of its high heat resistance.
- a metal film or a metal oxide film is stacked on an aluminum alloy film, whereby oxidation of the aluminum alloy film can be suppressed.
- a material for the metal film or the metal oxide film are titanium and titanium oxide.
- the conductive film having a property of transmitting visible light and a film containing any of the above metal materials may be stacked.
- a stacked film of silver and ITO or a stacked film of an alloy of silver and magnesium and ITO can be used.
- the electrodes may be formed separately by an evaporation method or a sputtering method.
- a discharging method such as an ink-jet method, a printing method such as a screen printing method, or a plating method may be used.
- the EL layer 402 includes at least a light-emitting layer.
- the EL layer 402 may further include one or more layers containing any of a substance with a high hole-injection property, a substance with a high hole-transport property, a hole-blocking material, a substance with a high electron-transport property, a substance with a high electron-injection property, a substance with a bipolar property (a substance with a high electron- and hole-transport property), and the like.
- a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound can be used, and an inorganic compound may also be used.
- the above-described layers included in the EL layer 402 can be formed separately by any of the following methods: an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, and the like.
- organic EL element is described here as an example of a light-emitting element, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto, and a display element, a light-emitting element, a semiconductor element, or the like may be used.
- a display element a display device that is a device including a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device that is a device including a light-emitting element can employ a variety of modes or can include a variety of elements.
- Examples of a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, or a light-emitting device include an EL element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an LED (e.g., a white LED, a red LED, a green LED, or a blue LED), a transistor (a transistor that emits light depending on current), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a micro electro mechanical system (MEMS), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a digital micro shutter (DMS), an interferometric modulator display (IMOD) element, an electrowetting element, a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube, which are display media whose contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittance, or the like is changed by electromagnetic action.
- an EL element e
- examples of display devices having EL elements include an EL display.
- Examples of a display device including an electron emitter are a field emission display (FED) and a surface-conduction electron-emitter display (SED)-type flat panel display.
- Examples of a display device including a liquid crystal element include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display).
- An example of a display device including electronic ink or electrophoretic elements is electronic paper.
- the coloring layer is a colored layer that transmits light in a specific wavelength range.
- a red (R) color filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range a green (G) color filter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a blue (B) color filter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, or the like can be used.
- Each coloring layer is formed in a desired position with any of various materials by a printing method, an inkjet method, an etching method using a photolithography method, or the like.
- the light-blocking layer is provided between the adjacent coloring layers.
- the light-blocking layer blocks light emitted from an adjacent organic EL element to prevent color mixture between adjacent organic EL elements.
- the coloring layer is provided such that its end portion overlaps the light-blocking layer, whereby light leakage can be suppressed.
- a material that can block light from the organic EL element can be used; for example, a black matrix may be formed using a resin material containing a metal material, pigment, or dye. Note that it is preferable to provide the light-blocking layer in a region other than the light-emitting portion, such as a driver circuit portion, in which case undesired leakage of guided light or the like can be suppressed.
- an overcoat covering the coloring layer and the light-blocking layer may be provided.
- the overcoat is formed with a material that transmits light emitted from the organic EL element; for example, an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon oxide film, an organic insulating film such as an acrylic film or a polyimide film can be used, and a stacked structure of an organic insulating film and an inorganic insulating film may be used.
- a material that has high wettability with respect to the material of the bonding layer 407 is preferably used as the material of the overcoat.
- an oxide conductive film such as an ITO film or a metal film such as an Ag film that is thin enough to transmit light is preferably used as the overcoat 453 (see FIGS. 14B and 14C ).
- the conductive layer functioning as an electrode or a wiring of the transistor, an auxiliary electrode or an auxiliary wiring of the organic EL element, or the like can be found to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using any of metal materials such as molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, aluminum, copper, neodymium, and scandium, and an alloy material containing any of these elements.
- the conductive layer may be formed using a conductive metal oxide.
- indium oxide e.g., In 2 O 3
- tin oxide e.g., SnO 2
- zinc oxide ZnO
- ITO indium zinc oxide
- indium zinc oxide e.g., In 2 O 3 —ZnO
- any of these metal oxide materials in which silicon oxide is contained can be used.
- the thickness of the auxiliary wiring can be greater than or equal to 0.1 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 3 ⁇ m, preferably greater than or equal to 0.1 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 0.5 ⁇ m.
- a paste e.g., silver paste
- a metal forming the auxiliary wiring aggregates in the form of particles.
- the surface of the auxiliary wiring becomes rough and has many gaps, so that it is difficult for the EL layer to cover the auxiliary electrode completely.
- the upper electrode and the auxiliary wiring are electrically connected to each other easily, which is preferable.
- a hemispherical lens, a micro lens array, a film provided with an uneven surface structure, a light diffusing film, or the like can be used.
- a light outcoupling structure can be formed by attaching the lens or film to the substrate with an adhesive or the like that has substantially the same refractive index as the substrate or the lens or film.
- the connector 497 it is possible to use a paste-like or sheet-like material that is obtained by mixture of metal particles and a thermosetting resin and for which anisotropic electric conductivity is provided by thermocompression bonding.
- the metal particles particles in which two or more kinds of metals are layered, for example, nickel particles coated with gold are preferably used.
- This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- a light-emitting device, a display device, a semiconductor device, or the like that can be used for an electronic appliance or a lighting device can be fabricated with a high yield by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention.
- a flexible electronic appliance or lighting device having high productivity can be fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention.
- Examples of an electronic appliance include a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer or the like, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a digital photo frame, a mobile phone (also referred to as a mobile phone device), a portable game machine, a portable information terminal, an audio reproducing device, and a large game machine such as a pinball machine.
- a television set also referred to as a television or a television receiver
- a monitor of a computer or the like a digital camera, a digital video camera, a digital photo frame
- a mobile phone also referred to as a mobile phone device
- a portable game machine a portable information terminal
- an audio reproducing device and a large game machine such as a pinball machine.
- the device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention has flexibility and therefore can be incorporated along a curved inside/outside wall surface of a house or a building or a curved interior/exterior surface of a car.
- FIG. 15A illustrates an example of a mobile phone.
- the mobile phone 7400 is provided with a display portion 7402 incorporated in a housing 7401 , operation buttons 7403 , an external connection port 7404 , a speaker 7405 , a microphone 7406 , and the like.
- the cellular phone 7400 is fabricated using the display device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention for the display portion 7402 .
- One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable mobile phone having a curved display portion to be provided with a high yield.
- buttons 7403 With the operation buttons 7403 , the power can be turned on or off. In addition, types of images displayed on the display portion 7402 can be switched; switching images from a mail creation screen to a main menu screen.
- FIG. 15B illustrates an example of a wrist-watch-type portable information terminal.
- a portable information terminal 7100 includes a housing 7101 , a display portion 7102 , a band 7103 , a buckle 7104 , an operation button 7105 , an input/output terminal 7106 , and the like.
- the portable information terminal 7100 is capable of executing a variety of applications such as mobile phone calls, e-mailing, reading and editing texts, music reproduction, Internet communication, and a computer game.
- the display surface of the display portion 7102 is bent, and images can be displayed on the bent display surface. Furthermore, the display portion 7102 includes a touch sensor, and operation can be performed by touching the screen with a finger, a stylus, or the like. For example, by touching an icon 7107 displayed on the display portion 7102 , an application can be started.
- the operation button 7105 With the operation button 7105 , a variety of functions such as ON/OFF of the power, ON/OFF of wireless communication, setting and cancellation of manner mode, and setting and cancellation of power saving mode can be performed.
- the functions of the operation button 7105 can be set freely by setting the operation system incorporated in the portable information terminal 7100 .
- the portable information terminal 7100 can employ near field communication that is a communication method based on an existing communication standard. In that case, for example, mutual communication between the portable information terminal 7100 and a headset capable of wireless communication can be performed, and thus hands-free calling is possible.
- the portable information terminal 7100 includes the input/output terminal 7106 , and data can be directly transmitted to and received from another information terminal via a connector. Charging through the input/output terminal 7106 is possible. Note that the charging operation may be performed by wireless power feeding without using the input/output terminal 7106 .
- the display portion 7102 of the portable information terminal 7100 includes a light-emitting panel fabricated by using one embodiment of the present invention.
- One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable portable information terminal having a curved display portion to be provided with a high yield.
- FIGS. 15C to 15E illustrate examples of a lighting device.
- Lighting devices 7200 , 7210 , and 7220 each include a stage 7201 provided with an operation switch 7203 and a light-emitting portion supported by the stage 7201 .
- the lighting device 7200 illustrated in FIG. 15C includes a light-emitting portion 7202 having a wave-shaped light-emitting surface, and thus has good design.
- a light-emitting portion 7212 included in the lighting device 7210 illustrated in FIG. 15D has two convex-curved light-emitting portions symmetrically placed. Thus, light radiates from the lighting device 7210 in all directions.
- the lighting device 7220 illustrated in FIG. 15E includes a concave-curved light-emitting portion 7222 . This is suitable for illuminating a specific range because light emitted from the light-emitting portion 7222 is collected to the front of the lighting device 7220 .
- the light-emitting portion included in each of the lighting devices 7200 , 7210 , and 7220 are flexible; thus, the light-emitting portion may be fixed on a plastic member, a movable frame, or the like so that an emission surface of the light-emitting portion can be bent freely depending on the intended use.
- a housing provided with a light-emitting portion can be fixed on a ceiling or suspended from a ceiling. Since the light-emitting surface can be curved, the light-emitting surface is curved to have a depressed shape, whereby a particular region can be brightly illuminated, or the light-emitting surface is curved to have a projecting shape, whereby a whole room can be brightly illuminated.
- each light-emitting portion includes a light-emitting device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention.
- One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable lighting device having a curved light-emitting portion to be provided with a high yield.
- FIG. 15F illustrates an example of a portable display device.
- a display device 7300 includes a housing 7301 , a display portion 7302 , operation buttons 7303 , a display portion pull 7304 , and a control portion 7305 .
- the display device 7300 includes a rolled flexible display portion 7302 in the cylindrical housing 7301 .
- the display device 7300 can receive a video signal with the control portion 7305 and can display the received video on the display portion 7302 .
- a battery is included in the control portion 7305 .
- a terminal portion for connecting a connector may be included in the control portion 7305 so that a video signal or power can be directly supplied from the outside with a wiring.
- buttons 7303 By pressing the operation buttons 7303 , ON/OFF of the power, switching of displayed videos, and the like can be performed.
- FIG. 15G illustrates a display device 7300 in a state where the display portion 7302 is pulled out with the display portion pull 7304 . Videos can be displayed on the display portion 7302 in this state. Furthermore, the operation buttons 7303 on the surface of the housing 7301 allow one-handed operation. The operation buttons 7303 are provided not in the center of the housing 7301 but on one side of the housing 7301 as illustrated in FIG. 15F , which makes one-handed operation easy.
- a reinforcement frame may be provided for a side portion of the display portion 7302 so that the display portion 7302 has a flat display surface when pulled out.
- a speaker may be provided for the housing so that sound is output with an audio signal received together with a video signal.
- the display portion 7302 includes a display device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention.
- One embodiment of the present invention enables a lightweight and highly reliable display device to be provided with a high yield.
- FIGS. 9D to 9F illustrate a foldable portable information terminal 310 .
- FIG. 9D illustrates the portable information terminal 310 that is opened.
- FIG. 9E illustrates the portable information terminal 310 that is being opened or being folded.
- FIG. 9F illustrates the portable information terminal 310 that is folded.
- the portable information terminal 310 is highly portable when folded. When the portable information terminal 310 is opened, a seamless large display region is highly browsable.
- a display panel 311 is supported by three housings 315 joined together by hinges 313 .
- the portable information terminal 310 can be reversibly changed in shape from an opened state to a folded state.
- a display device fabricated by any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention can be used for the display panel 311 .
- a display device that can be bent with a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm can be used.
- FIG. 9G is a perspective view illustrating an external shape of the portable information terminal 330 .
- FIG. 9H is a top view of the portable information terminal 330 .
- FIG. 9I is a perspective view illustrating an external shape of a portable information terminal 340 .
- the portable information terminals 330 and 340 each function as, for example, one or more of a telephone set, a notebook, and an information browsing system. Specifically, the portable information terminals 330 and 340 each can be used as a smartphone.
- the portable information terminals 330 and 340 can display characters and image information on its plurality of surfaces. For example, three operation buttons 339 can be displayed on one surface ( FIGS. 9G and 9I ). In addition, information 337 indicated by dashed rectangles can be displayed on another surface ( FIGS. 9H and 9I ). Examples of the information 337 include notification from a social networking service (SNS), display indicating reception of an e-mail or an incoming call, the title of an e-mail or the like, the sender of an e-mail or the like, the date, the time, remaining battery, and the reception strength of an antenna. Alternatively, the operation buttons 339 , an icon, or the like may be displayed in place of the information 337 . Although FIGS. 9G and 9H illustrate an example in which the information 337 is displayed at the top, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. The information may be displayed, for example, on the side as illustrated in FIG. 9I .
- SNS social networking service
- a user of the portable information terminal 330 can see the display (here, the information 337 ) with the portable information terminal 330 put in a breast pocket of his/her clothes.
- a caller's phone number, name, or the like of an incoming call is displayed in a position that can be seen from above the portable information terminal 330 .
- the user can see the display without taking out the portable information terminal 330 from the pocket and decide whether to answer the call.
- a display device fabricated by any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention can be used for a display portion 333 mounted in each of a housing 335 of the portable information terminal 330 and a housing 336 of the portable information terminal 340 .
- One embodiment of the present invention makes it possible to provide a highly reliable display device having a curved display portion with a high yield.
- This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- FIGS. 16A to 16C a peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 16A to 16C .
- the peeling layer 103 is formed to a thickness of greater than or equal to 10 nm over the formation substrate 101 , and the layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer ( FIG. 16A ).
- a 30-nm-thick tungsten film is formed and dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O) plasma treatment is performed on a surface of the tungsten film.
- N 2 O dinitrogen monoxide
- a tungsten film 373 over the formation substrate 101 and a tungsten oxide film 374 over the tungsten film 373 can be formed as the peeling layer 103 .
- the thickness of the tungsten oxide film 374 can be, for example, approximately 10 nm.
- a layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed as follows: a layer containing tungsten is formed and an insulating layer formed of an oxide is formed thereover, so that the layer containing an oxide of tungsten is formed at the interface between the layer containing tungsten and the insulating layer.
- the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the layer containing tungsten. Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas.
- the adhesion between the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled can be controlled. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- the layer to be peeled 105 and a substrate are attached to each other with a bonding layer, and the bonding layer is cured. After that, a peeling trigger is formed. Then, the layer to be peeled 105 and the formation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger.
- FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional TEM image showing the tungsten oxide film 374 that remains on the layer to be peeled 105 after the peeling from the formation substrate 101 .
- a layer 376 in FIG. 16B is a carbon film provided for cross-sectional TEM observation.
- the tungsten oxide film 374 that remains in a device such as a light-emitting device fabricated by the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention causes a defect such as a shift of transistor characteristics in some cases.
- the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention includes a step of removing the tungsten oxide film 374 remaining on the layer to be peeled 105 after peeling occurs at the interface between the tungsten film 373 and the tungsten oxide film 374 or in the vicinity of the interface.
- the tungsten oxide film 374 may be removed completely or partly.
- the tungsten oxide film may remain as long as a device is not damaged.
- water or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used to remove the tungsten oxide film.
- an ethanol aqueous solution or an H 2 O 2 aqueous solution can be used. Since the rate at which the tungsten oxide film can be removed varies depending on the temperature of water or a solution, the water or the solution may be selected as appropriate. For example, water at a temperature of approximately 60° C. can remove the tungsten oxide film more easily than water at room temperature.
- the tungsten film may be wiped off with a non-woven wiping cloth or the like that has absorbed water or a solution, or the tungsten oxide film may be removed by soaking a sample in water or a solution.
- the tungsten oxide film may alternatively be removed physically.
- the tungsten oxide film may be removed by polishing with sandpaper or the like.
- FIG. 16C is a cross-sectional TEM image after removing the tungsten oxide film. Note that the layer 376 in FIG. 16C is the carbon film provided for cross-sectional TEM observation.
- a stack of the tungsten film and the tungsten oxide film is used as the peeling layer, and the tungsten oxide film that remains on the layer to be peeled is removed after separation of the formation substrate and the layer to be peeled.
- This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- a defect such as a shift of transistor characteristics can be suppressed.
- Described in this embodiment are measurement results of the force required for peeling a layer to be peeled from a formation substrate in samples in each of which a layer to be peeled is formed over the formation substrate with the peeling layer therebetween.
- FIG. 17A illustrates a structure of each sample in this example.
- the sample includes the formation substrate 101 , a base film 301 over the formation substrate 101 , the peeling layer 103 over the base film 301 , the layer to be peeled 105 over the peeling layer 103 , the bonding layer 107 over the layer to be peeled 105 , and the substrate 109 over the bonding layer 107 .
- Table 1 shows differences in the fabrication conditions between the samples.
- an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the base film 301 over a glass substrate serving as the formation substrate 101 .
- the silicon oxynitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N 2 O gas were 10 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the supplied power was 30 W, the pressure was 22 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- a tungsten film serving as the peeling layer 103 was formed over the base film 301 .
- the thickness of the tungsten film differs among the samples.
- the tungsten films serving as the peeling layers in the samples were formed to the respective thicknesses shown in Table 1.
- the tungsten film was formed by a sputtering method under the following conditions: the flow rate of an Ar gas was 100 sccm, the power supply was 60 kW, the pressure was 2 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 100° C.
- N 2 O plasma treatment was performed for 240 seconds under the following conditions: the flow rate of an N 2 O gas was 100 sccm, the power supply was 500 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. Whether the N 2 O plasma treatment was performed depended on the sample (see Table 1).
- the layer to be peeled 105 was formed over the peeling layer 103 .
- the layer to be peeled 105 had a stacked-layer structure of a first silicon oxynitride film 303 and an insulating layer 305 .
- the structure of the layer to be peeled 105 differs from sample to sample as shown in Table 1.
- the first silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed to a thickness of approximately 600 nm over the peeling layer 103 .
- the first silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N 2 O gas were 75 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- the first silicon oxynitride film 303 was processed into an island shape by wet etching and the peeling layer 103 was processed into an island shape by dry etching.
- the insulating layer 305 was formed over the first silicon oxynitride film 303 .
- the insulating layer 305 in Structure 1 of the layer to be peeled had a four-layer structure of a first silicon nitride film, a second silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, and a third silicon oxynitride film.
- the first silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first silicon oxynitride film 303 .
- the first silicon nitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H 2 gas, and an NH 3 gas were 30 sccm, 800 sccm, and 300 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 600 W, the pressure was 60 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- the second silicon oxynitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first silicon nitride film.
- the second silicon oxynitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N 2 O gas were 50 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- the silicon nitride oxide film was formed to a thickness of approximately 140 nm over the second silicon oxynitride film.
- the silicon nitride oxide film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H 2 gas, an N 2 gas, an NH 3 gas, and an N 2 O gas were 110 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, and 70 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 320 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- the third silicon oxynitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 100 nm over the silicon nitride oxide film.
- the third silicon oxynitride film was formed under the same conditions as the base film 301 .
- the first silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed in the same manner as Structure 1.
- the insulating layer 305 had a single layer structure of the second silicon nitride film.
- the second silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first silicon oxynitride film 303 .
- the second silicon nitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an N 2 gas, and an NH 3 gas were 38 sccm, 1000 sccm, and 250 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 150 W, the pressure was 50 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- the first silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed in the same manner as Structure 1.
- the insulating layer 305 had a single layer structure of the first silicon nitride film.
- the first silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first silicon oxynitride film 303 .
- the first silicon nitride film was formed under the same conditions as those of Structure 1.
- the layer to be peeled 105 and a film with an adhesive were attached to each other to form the bonding layer 107 and the substrate 109 over the layer to be peeled 105 .
- a jig illustrated in FIG. 17B was used for the measurement.
- the jig illustrated in FIG. 17B includes a plurality of guide rollers 154 and a plurality of support rollers 153 .
- a tape 151 is attached onto a layer 150 including a layer to be peeled that is formed over the formation substrate 101 and an end portion of the tape 151 is partly peeled in advance.
- the formation substrate 101 is fixed to the jig so that the tape 151 is held by the support rollers 153 , and the tape 151 and the layer 150 including the layer to be peeled are positioned perpendicular to the formation substrate 101 .
- the force required for peeling can be measured as follows: when the tape 151 is pulled at a rate of 20 mm/min in a direction perpendicular to the formation substrate 101 to peel the layer 150 including the layer to be peeled from the formation substrate 101 , the pulling force in the perpendicular direction is measured.
- the formation substrate 101 moves in the plane direction along the guide rollers 154 with the peeling layer 103 exposed.
- the support rollers 153 and the guide rollers 154 are rotatable so that the formation substrate 101 and the layer 150 including the layer to be peeled are not affected by friction during the move.
- a compact table-top universal tester (EZ-TEST EZ-S-50N) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation was used.
- EZ-TEST EZ-S-50N an adhesive tape/adhesive sheet testing method based on the standard number JIS Z0237 of Japanese Industrial Standards (RS) was referred to.
- RS Japanese Industrial Standards
- FIG. 18 shows the forces required for peeling in Samples 1 to 4.
- Table 2 shows the stress on each layer included in the layer to be peeled 105 and the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 .
- the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 in the case where the layer to be peeled 105 had Structure 2 is expressed as a positive value (i.e., tensile stress).
- Sample 2 in which the layer to be peeled had Structure 2 required a small amount of force for peeling as shown in FIG. 18 , a defect such as a crack occurred at the time of peeling.
- the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 in the case where the layer to be peeled 105 had Structure 1 or 3 is expressed as a negative value (i.e., compressive stress).
- the force required for peeling in Sample 3 was greater than or equal to 0.14 N, which indicates a low yield of a peeling process.
- the force required for peeling in Sample 1 is less than 0.14 N, the force is greater than that in Sample 2.
- the comparison between Sample 1 and Sample 4 demonstrates that the N 2 O plasma treatment can reduce the force required for peeling.
- the results shown in FIG. 18 reveal that the force required for peeling is high (e.g., the compressive stress on the layer to be peeled is high) depending on the structure of the layer to be peeled 105 when the thickness of the peeling layer 103 is 30 nm.
- the results shown in FIG. 18 also reveal that addition of a step (e.g., N 2 O plasma treatment) enables a reduction in the force required for peeling.
- results shown in FIG. 18 and Table 2 reveal that the force required for peeling in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a positive value (i.e., tensile stress) is lower than that in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a negative value (i.e., compressive stress).
- results shown in FIG. 18 and Table 2 also reveal that a crack is less likely to occur at the time of peeling in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a negative value (i.e., compressive stress) than in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a positive value (i.e., tensile stress).
- FIG. 19 shows the force required for peeling in Samples 1 and 5 to 8.
- the stress on each layer included in the layer to be peeled 105 and the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 that are shown in Table 2 can also be referred to for Samples 5 to 8.
- the stress on the tungsten film with each thickness was measured: the tungsten films had stresses of 1145.8 MPa, 773.2 MPa, and 607.6 MPa when the thicknesses were 30 nm, 50 nm, and 100 nm, respectively. This revealed that the tensile stress was able to be increased as the thickness of the tungsten film was decreased.
- the water vapor transmission rate of an insulating layer that can be used in one embodiment of the present invention was measured.
- an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a base film over a glass substrate by a plasma CVD method. Then, an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed as a peeling layer by a sputtering method.
- N 2 O plasma treatment was performed on a surface of the tungsten film, and five layers were stacked as an insulating layer (an insulating layer 392 in FIG. 20A ).
- an approximately 600-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a first insulating layer.
- the silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N 2 O gas were 75 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- silicon nitride film was formed as a second insulating layer.
- the silicon nitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H 2 gas, and an NH 3 gas were 30 sccm, 800 sccm, and 300 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 600 W, the pressure was 60 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- silicon oxynitride film was formed as a third insulating layer.
- the silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N 2 O gas were 50 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- silicon nitride oxide film was formed as a fourth insulating layer.
- the silicon nitride oxide film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H 2 gas, an N 2 gas, an NH 3 gas, and an N 2 O gas were 110 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, and 70 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 320 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- silicon oxynitride film was formed as a fifth insulating layer.
- the silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an H 2 O gas were 10 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 30 W, the pressure was 22 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- a two-component epoxy adhesive (product name: R2007/H-1010, produced by ALTECO INC.) was applied as a sealing resin 390 , and it was cured while being left still at room temperature for 24 hours. Then, a UV peeling tape was attached to the sealing resin 390 . After that, peeling was performed at the interface between the peeling layer and the first insulating layer to remove the glass substrate provided with the base film and the peeling layer.
- the above-described two-component epoxy adhesive was applied as an adhesive layer 394 to an exposed surface of the first insulating layer, and a 20- ⁇ m-thick film was attached as a substrate 396 to the adhesive layer 394 with a laminator. Then, the adhesive layer 394 was cured, and the above UV peeling film was irradiated with UV light to peel the film.
- the water vapor transmission rate of the fabricated sample was measured.
- a highly sensitive water vapor transmission rate measuring instrument product name. HiBarSens, produced by Fraunhofer IWS
- a diffusion control method was used as a measuring mode.
- the temperature and the relative humidity on the water vapor supply side were set at 38.0° C. and 90% RH, respectively. The measurement was conducted twice.
- the measuring instrument in this example can be used in three modes, a static control method, a dynamic control method, and a diffusion control method, and is capable of highly accurate and highly sensitive measurement of a water vapor transmission rate.
- the measurement limit of many measuring instruments is 10 ⁇ 5 g/m 2 ⁇ day to 10 ⁇ 6 g/m 2 ⁇ day; however, the measuring instrument used in this example is capable of highly accurate measurement up to 10 ⁇ 7 g/m 2 ⁇ day.
- the measuring instrument used in this example includes one chamber.
- the chamber is divided into two parts by a sample 171 set as shown in FIG. 20C .
- One part of the chamber serves as the water vapor filled chamber 173 for supplying water vapor and the other part serves as a water vapor transmission chamber 175 for measuring the water vapor concentration.
- Water vapor with a constant temperature and constant humidity is supplied to the water vapor filled chamber 173 , and the amount of water vapor moving to the water vapor transmission chamber 175 through the sample 171 is measured.
- Dry nitrogen can be supplied to the water vapor transmission chamber 175 .
- the supply of dry nitrogen can be controlled by opening and closing a valve depending on the measurement method.
- the water vapor transmission chamber 175 is also provided with a laser light source and a detector and has a 2-m-long light path therein.
- the concentration of water vapor in the water vapor transmission chamber 175 can be measured by measuring the decay rate of the intensity of laser light.
- the first mode is a dynamic measurement method.
- dry nitrogen is constantly supplied at a fixed flow rate into the measurement chamber, and WVTR is estimated from the concentration of water vapor in the equilibrium state on the basis of the fact that WVTR has a fixed value.
- the dynamic measurement method is suitable for accurately measuring WVTR up to 10 ⁇ 4 level.
- the second mode is a static measurement method.
- the static measurement method supply of dry nitrogen into the measurement chamber is stopped, and WVTR is estimated by measuring a change in the amount of water vapor that passes through the sample and gradually accumulates in the measurement chamber.
- the static measurement method is capable of measuring WVTR even at 10 ⁇ 6 level with high sensitivity, but the accuracy tends to be low.
- the third mode is a diffusion control method.
- the diffusion control method In the diffusion control method, supply of dry nitrogen into the measurement chamber is stopped and dry nitrogen is discharged through a narrow tube connected to the measurement chamber.
- the diffusion control method is a method in which WVTR is estimated using Fick's law of diffusion and has advantages of both the dynamic measurement method and the static measurement method.
- the diffusion control method is suitable for performing measurement on a sample whose WVTR is known to be low in advance.
- FIG. 20A schematically illustrates the measurement method.
- the water vapor transmission rate can be measured in such a manner that water vapor is supplied from the substrate 396 side of the sample and water vapor transmitted to the sealing resin 390 side is detected.
- FIG. 20B and FIG. 25 show measurement results.
- the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents water vapor transmission rate (WVTR).
- WVTR water vapor transmission rate
- the water vapor transmission rate of the sample was less than 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 g/m 2 ⁇ day in the equilibrium state.
- the water vapor transmission rate of the sample in the equilibrium state was less than or equal to 7 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 g/m 2 ⁇ day that is the lower measurement limit.
- the water vapor transmission rate of general aluminum foil is 1.5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 g/m 2 ⁇ day and the water vapor transmission rate of a film with an excellent gas barrier property is 2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 g/m 2 ⁇ day.
- the water vapor transmission rates of the samples fabricated in this example were much lower than those of the aluminum foil and the film with an excellent gas barrier property.
- a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating layer 392 having the above-described structure, and a preservation test was performed on the light-emitting device.
- FIG. 30A shows a mask pattern of an examination sample in the preservation test. Specifically, a light-emitting area with a size of 2 mm 2 that was 10 mm or more away from an end portion of the sample was examined so that examination results were not adversely affected by entry of impurities such as moisture from a side surface of the sample.
- a method for fabricating the examination sample is described with reference to FIGS. 31A to 31C .
- an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a base film over a glass substrate 181 by a plasma CVD method.
- an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed as a peeling layer 183 by a sputtering method.
- N 2 O plasma treatment was performed on a surface of the tungsten film, and then an insulating layer 185 was formed. Since a structure and a formation method of the insulating layer 185 are the same as those of the insulating layer 392 ( FIG. 20A ), the description thereof is omitted. After that, heat treatment was performed at 450° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere for 1 hour. Then, an element layer 187 was formed over the insulating layer 185 .
- the element layer 187 includes an organic EL element emitting blue light.
- a 100-nm-thick silicon oxide film and a 100-nm-thick silicon nitride film were formed as a protective layer 189 by a sputtering method in order to suppress deterioration of the organic EL element due to entry of impurities such as moisture from a side surface of the examination sample and a gas released from a resin used for a bonding layer.
- a glass substrate 193 was attached to the protective layer 189 with a bonding layer 191 ( FIG. 31A ).
- As the bonding layer 191 an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin was used.
- the glass substrate 181 was peeled ( FIG. 31B ), and a resin substrate 197 was attached to the exposed insulating layer 185 with a bonding layer 195 ( FIG. 31C ).
- As the bonding layer 195 a two-component epoxy resin was used.
- FIG. 32A shows current-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the peeling and transfer process. There was no difference in the characteristics between before and after the peeling and transfer process. This indicates that the peeling and transfer process did not cause deterioration of the electrical characteristics such as a short circuit or an increase in contact resistance.
- FIG. 32B shows luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the peeling and transfer process. The dependence of luminance on voltage and the rising voltage did not change.
- FIG. 30B are photographs showing light emission before and after the preservation test.
- FIG. 30B are three photographs showing light emission before the preservation test, light emission after a lapse of 240 hours from the start of the preservation test, and light emission after a lapse of 500 hours from the start of the preservation test.
- the sample was observed with an optical microscope at 50-fold magnification. Even after a lapse of 500 hours from the start of the preservation test, an increase in the number of dark spots and shrink were not observed.
- FIG. 33A shows current-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the preservation test
- FIG. 33B shows luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the preservation test.
- the current-voltage characteristics and the luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element did not change even in the preservation test for 500 hours. This revealed that the use of the insulating layer formed in this example can suppress deterioration of the organic EL element.
- a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating layer 392 formed in Example 2 and the reliability of the light-emitting device was evaluated.
- the description of the light-emitting device is omitted.
- the insulating layer 392 formed in Example 2 was used as the insulating layers 424 and 226 .
- a preservation test was performed on the fabricated light-emitting device at a temperature of 65° C. and a humidity of 90% RH for 1000 hours.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B are optical micrographs showing light emission states of a central portion of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B are the optical micrographs before the preservation test and after a lapse of 1000 hours from the start of the preservation test, respectively.
- a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating layer 392 formed in Example 2 and the reliability of the light-emitting device was evaluated.
- the light-emitting device fabricated in this example is a bendable display.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate the light-emitting device fabricated in this example.
- FIG. 24A is a plan view of the light-emitting device
- FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed dotted line X7-Y7 in FIG. 24A .
- the light-emitting device fabricated in this example is different from that in Structure Example 5 described with reference to FIG. 14B in Embodiment 2 in that the flexible substrate 428 is smaller than the flexible substrate 420 .
- the description of Structure Example 5 can be referred to for the other parts.
- the light-emitting device was fabricated by Peeling Method 4 described in Embodiment 1.
- the peeling layer 203 was formed over a glass substrate serving as the formation substrate 201 , and the layer to be peeled 205 was formed over the peeling layer 203 .
- the peeling layer 223 was formed over a glass substrate serving as the formation substrate 221 , and the layer to be peeled 225 was formed over the peeling layer 223 .
- the formation substrate 201 and the formation substrate 221 were attached so that the surfaces provided with the respective layers to be peeled faced each other. Then, the two formation substrates were peeled from the respective layers to be peeled, and flexible substrates were attached to the respective layers to be peeled. Materials for each of the layers are described below.
- a stacked-layer structure of a tungsten film and a tungsten oxide film thereover was formed as each of the peeling layers 203 and 223 .
- an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed by a sputtering method and subjected to N 2 O plasma treatment, and then a layer to be peeled was formed.
- the peeling layer having the stacked-layer structure right after deposition is not easily peeled; however, by reaction with an inorganic insulating film by heat treatment, the state of the interface between the peeling layer and the inorganic insulating film is changed to become brittle. Then, forming a peeling trigger enables physical peeling.
- the insulating layer 424 , a transistor, and the organic EL element 450 were formed as the layer to be peeled 205 .
- a color filter, which corresponds to the coloring layer 432 , and the like were formed as the layer to be peeled 225 .
- the insulating layer 392 formed in Example 2 was used as the insulating layers 424 and 226 .
- CAAC-OS c-axis aligned crystalline oxide semiconductor
- a CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor having c-axis alignment in a direction perpendicular to the film surface. It has been found that oxide semiconductors have a variety of crystal structures other than an amorphous structure and a single-crystal structure. An example of such structures is a nano-crystal (nc)-OS, which is an aggregate of nanoscale microcrystals. The crystallinity of the CAAC-OS is lower than that of a single crystal structure but higher than those of an amorphous structure and an nc-OS.
- a channel-etched transistor including an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide was used.
- the transistor can be fabricated over a glass substrate at a process temperature lower than 500° C.
- the temperature of the process for fabricating the element needs to be lower than the upper temperature limit of the organic resin.
- the formation substrate is a glass substrate and the peeling layer, which is an inorganic film, has high heat resistance; thus, the transistor can be fabricated at a temperature equal to that when a transistor is fabricated over a glass substrate. Thus, the performance and reliability of the transistor can be easily secured.
- the organic EL element 450 As the organic EL element 450 , a tandem organic EL element that included a fluorescence-emitting unit including a blue light-emitting layer and a phosphorescence-emitting unit including a green light-emitting layer and a red light-emitting layer was used.
- the organic EL element 450 is a top-emission organic EL element.
- As the first electrode 401 of the organic EL element 450 an aluminum film, a titanium film over the aluminum film, and an ITO film serving as an optical adjustment layer over the titanium film were stacked. The thickness of the optical adjustment layer was varied depending on the color of the pixel.
- FIG. 26 illustrates the light-emitting device fabricated in this example.
- the fabricated light-emitting device had a size of a light-emitting portion (pixel portion) of 3.4 inches diagonal, 540 ⁇ 960 ⁇ 3 (RGB) pixels, a pixel pitch of 0.078 mm ⁇ 0.078 mm, a resolution of 326 ppi, and an aperture ratio of 56.9%.
- the light-emitting device had a built-in scan driver (gate driver) and source driver.
- the light-emitting device had a thickness of less than or equal to 100 ⁇ m and a weight of 2 g. Note that different light-emitting devices were used for different bending tests.
- the fabricated light-emitting device was bent repeatedly while displaying an image.
- a bent portion is a middle portion of the light-emitting device and includes the light-emitting portion and the scan driver.
- FIG. 22A is a photograph showing a bend tester where the light-emitting device is set.
- FIG. 22B shows how a bending test is performed. Fixing the side where an FPC is provided allows the bending test to be performed while the light-emitting device is driven.
- the radius of curvature for bending a light-emitting device 99 was determined by the diameter of a metal rod 98 .
- FIG. 22B shows states during an inward bending test. In the bending test, one bending was performed in approximately 2 seconds. The results of the bending tests are described below.
- the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally after either outward bending or inward bending performed 100000 times.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 3 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 2 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 1 mm was performed 4000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed 300000 times on a light-emitting device with the same structure, a display portion also had no defect and a driver also operated normally.
- FIG. 27A shows the appearance of the light-emitting device after being subjected to bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm 100000 times.
- FIG. 27B shows display states before and after the bending test. As shown in FIG. 27A , warpage due to bending and a scratch on a surface were caused in the light-emitting device; however, the display state and the operation of the driver had no problem. Furthermore, a preservation test was performed at a high temperature of 65° C. and a high humidity of 90% for 100 hours after the bending test.
- FIG. 27C shows display states of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test. No defect was also observed in the bent portion after the preservation test, and a crack was probably not caused in the inorganic insulating film or the like in the light-emitting device.
- FIG. 28A shows the appearance of the light-emitting device after being subjected to the bending with a radius of curvature of 2 mm 100000 times.
- FIG. 28B shows display states before and after the bending test. As shown in FIG. 28A , warpage due to bending and a scratch on a surface were caused in the light-emitting device; however, the display state and the operation of the driver had no problem. Furthermore, a preservation test was performed at a high temperature of 65° C. and a high humidity of 90% for 100 hours after the bending test.
- FIG. 28C shows display states of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test. No defect was also observed in the bent portion after the preservation test, and a crack was probably not caused in the inorganic insulating film or the like in the light-emitting device.
- a bending test performed with a book-type bend tester that is capable of examining only resistance to bending is described below.
- the bend tester is repeatedly opened ( FIG. 29A ) and closed ( FIG. 29B ) like a book.
- the radius of curvature for bending the light-emitting device was determined by setting the distance between plates when bent.
- the bending characteristics of the light-emitting devices examined with the book-type bend tester are described.
- the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 1 mm was performed 9000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed on a light-emitting device with the same structure 300000 times, a display portion also had no defect and a driver also operated normally.
- a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating layer 392 formed in Example 2.
- the light-emitting device fabricated in this example is a book-type flexible organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display that can be repeatedly folded in two like a book.
- the light-emitting device can be bent such that a display surface faces inward.
- the light-emitting device can also be referred to as a bendable display.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate the light-emitting device fabricated in this example. Structures of the insulating layer 424 , the insulating layer 226 , a transistor, the organic EL element 450 , the first electrode 401 , the flexible substrate 420 , and the flexible substrate 428 in the light-emitting device are the same as those in the light-emitting device fabricated in Example 4; thus, the description thereof is omitted. In addition, a method for fabricating the light-emitting device and peeling layers used for the fabrication were the same as those described in Example 4.
- the fabricated light-emitting device had a size of a light-emitting portion (pixel portion) of 5.9 inches diagonal, 720 ⁇ 1280 ⁇ 3 (RGB) pixels, a pixel pitch of 0.102 mm ⁇ 0.102 mm, a resolution of 249 ppi, and an aperture ratio of 45.2%.
- a built-in scan driver and an external source driver attached by chip on film (COF) were used.
- FIGS. 23A to 23C are photographs showing a display of the light-emitting device fabricated in this example.
- FIG. 23A shows the light-emitting device that is opened
- FIG. 23B shows the light-emitting device that is being folded
- FIG. 23C shows the light-emitting device that is folded.
- the radius of curvature of a folded portion was 5 mm.
- the light-emitting device of this example had no problem in display and driving even when it was folded while displaying an image.
- the fabricated light-emitting device was repeatedly bent while displaying an image.
- a method of the bending test was the same as that described in Example 4. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
Abstract
The yield of a peeling process is improved. A first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate; a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer; a third step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form a peeling trigger; and a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled are performed. The use of the thin peeling layer can improve the yield of a peeling process regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
Description
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to an object, a method, or a fabrication method. In addition, the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture, or a composition of matter. One embodiment of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, a lighting device, and a method for fabricating these devices. In particular, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emitting device using an organic electroluminescence (hereinafter also referred to as EL) phenomenon, and a method for fabricating the light-emitting device. In particular, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a peeling method and a method for fabricating a device including a peeling process.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- In recent years, a flexible device in which a functional element such as a semiconductor element, a display element, or a light-emitting element is provided over a substrate having flexibility (hereinafter also referred to as a flexible substrate) has been developed. Typical examples of the flexible device include, as well as a lighting device and an image display device, a variety of semiconductor circuits including a semiconductor element such as a transistor.
- As a method for fabricating a device including a flexible substrate, a technique has been developed in which a functional element such as a thin film transistor or an organic EL element is formed over a formation substrate (e.g., a glass substrate or a quartz substrate), and then the functional element is transferred to a flexible substrate. This technique needs a step of peeling a layer including the functional element from the formation substrate (also referred to as a peeling step).
- For example,
Patent Document 1 discloses the following separation technique using laser ablation: a separation layer formed of amorphous silicon or the like is formed over a substrate, a layer to be peeled that includes a thin film element is formed over the separation layer, and the layer to be peeled is bonded to a transfer body with the use of an adhesive layer. The separation layer is ablated by laser light irradiation, so that peeling is caused in the separation layer. -
Patent Document 2 discloses a technique in which peeling is conducted by physical force with human hands or the like. In addition,Patent Document 2 discloses the following separation technique: a metal layer is formed between a substrate and an oxide layer and peeling is caused at the interface between the oxide layer and the metal layer by utilizing a weak bond between the oxide layer and the metal layer at their interface, whereby a layer to be peeled and the substrate are separated. - Patent Document 1: Japanese Published Patent Application No. H10-125931
- When it is difficult to perform peeling at a peeling interface in a peeling step, high stress is applied to the functional element and the functional element broken in some cases.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a peeling step.
- Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a fabrication process of a device such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device. In particular, another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve the yield of a fabrication process of a device such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device that is lightweight, thin, or flexible.
- Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to reduce the amount of dust generated in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to prevent entry of impurities in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to improve alignment accuracy at the time of attachment of substrates in a fabrication process of the device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable light-emitting device or the like.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel light-emitting device, display device, electronic appliance, or lighting device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel peeling method or a novel method for fabricating such a device.
- Note that the descriptions of these objects do not disturb the existence of other objects. In one embodiment of the present invention, there is no need to achieve all the objects. Other objects will be apparent from and can be derived from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- In the second step of the peeling method, at least a stack that includes the first layer and has stress with a negative value (i.e., compressive stress) is preferably formed as the layer to be peeled. For example, it is preferable to form, in the stack, at least the first layer having stress with a negative value on the peeling layer and a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer. Alternatively, it is preferable to form, in the stack, at least the first layer having stress with a negative value over the peeling layer, a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer, a third layer having stress with a negative value over the second layer, a fourth layer having stress with a positive value (i.e., tensile stress) over the third layer, and a fifth layer having stress with a negative value over the fourth layer. For example, an oxide insulating film may be formed as the first layer, and a nitride insulating film may be formed as the second layer.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a bonding layer while the bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer that overlap the bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a first bonding layer and a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer while the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer overlapped by the second bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- One embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a peeling process. One embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a fabrication process of a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device. In particular, one embodiment of the present invention can improve the yield of a fabrication process of a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, a display device, an electronic appliance, or a lighting device that is lightweight, thin, or flexible.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a novel light-emitting device, display device, electronic appliance, or lighting device. One embodiment of the present invention can provide a novel peeling method or a novel method for fabricating a device.
- Note that the description of these effects does not disturb the existence of other effects. One embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily achieve all the objects listed above. Other effects will be apparent from and can be derived from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.
-
FIGS. 1A to 1F illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 2A to 2C illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 3A to 3D illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 4A to 4D illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 5A to 5D illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 6A to 6D illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 7A to 7D illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 8A to 8C illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 9A to 9C illustrate planar shapes of a peeling layer andFIGS. 9D to 9I illustrate examples of electronic appliances. -
FIGS. 10A to 10C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices. -
FIGS. 11A to 11C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices. - FIGS. 12A1, 12A2, 12B, and 12C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
-
FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate examples of light-emitting devices. - FIGS. 14A1, 14A2, 14B, and 14C illustrate examples of light-emitting devices.
-
FIGS. 15A to 15G illustrate examples of electronic appliances and lighting devices. -
FIGS. 16A to 16C illustrate a peeling method. -
FIGS. 17A and 17B illustrate a sample and an apparatus used for measurement in Example 1. -
FIG. 18 shows measurement results of force required for peeling in Example 1. -
FIG. 19 shows measurement results of force required for peeling in Example 1. -
FIG. 20A illustrates a sample in Example 2,FIG. 20B shows measurement results of water vapor transmission rates, andFIG. 20C illustrates a structure of an apparatus for measuring water vapor transmission rates in Example 2. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B show optical micrographs of a light-emitting device before and after a preservation test in Example 3. -
FIGS. 22A to 22C are photographs and a diagram illustrating a bending test in Example 4. -
FIGS. 23A to 23C show display conditions of a light-emitting device in Example 5. -
FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate an example of a light-emitting device. -
FIG. 25 shows measurement results of water vapor transmission rates in Example 2. -
FIG. 26 illustrates a bent portion in Example 4. -
FIGS. 27A to 27C show results of a bending test and a preservation test in Example 4. -
FIGS. 28A to 28C show results of a bending test and a preservation test in Example 4. -
FIGS. 29A and 29B are photographs of a bend tester in Example 4. -
FIGS. 30A and 30B show a mask pattern and results of a preservation test in Example 2. -
FIGS. 31A to 31C illustrate a method for fabricating an examination sample in Example 2. -
FIGS. 32A and 32B show characteristics of organic EL elements in Example 2. -
FIGS. 33A and 33B show characteristics of organic EL elements in Example 2. - Embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the present invention is not limited to the description below, and it is easily understood by those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description in the following embodiments.
- Note that in the structures of the invention described below, the same portions or portions having similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals in different drawings, and description of such portions is not repeated. The same hatching pattern is applied to portions having similar functions, and the portions are not especially denoted by reference numerals in some cases.
- In addition, the position, size, range, or the like of each structure illustrated in drawings and the like is not accurately represented in some cases for easy understanding. Therefore, the disclosed invention is not necessarily limited to the position, the size, the range, or the like disclosed in the drawings and the like.
- A layer to be peeled can be formed over a formation substrate, peeled from the formation substrate, and then transferred to another substrate. With this method, for example, a layer to be peeled that is formed over a formation substrate having high heat resistance can be transferred to a substrate having low heat resistance. The temperature at which the layer to be peeled is formed is not limited by the substrate having low heat resistance. The layer to be peeled is transferred to a substrate or the like that is more lightweight or flexible or thinner than the formation substrate, whereby a variety of devices such as a semiconductor device, a light-emitting device, or a display device can be made lightweight, flexible, and thin.
- A device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention includes a functional element. Examples of the functional element include a semiconductor element such as a transistor; a light-emitting diode; a light-emitting element such as an inorganic EL element and an organic EL element; and a display element such as a liquid crystal element. For example, a semiconductor device including a sealed transistor and a light-emitting device including a sealed light-emitting element (here, a display device including a transistor and a light-emitting element that are sealed is also included) are also examples of the device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- For example, in order to protect an organic EL element that is likely to deteriorate because of moisture or the like, a protective film with an excellent gas barrier property can be formed over a glass substrate at a high temperature and transferred to a flexible organic resin substrate. By forming the organic EL element over the protective film transferred to the organic resin substrate, a highly reliable flexible light-emitting device can be fabricated even when the organic resin substrate has low heat resistance and a poor gas barrier property.
- Another example is as follows: after a protective film having an excellent gas barrier property is formed over a glass substrate at a high temperature and an organic EL element is formed over the protective film, the protective film and the organic EL element can be peeled from the glass substrate and transferred to an organic resin substrate having a low heat resistance, a poor gas barrier property, and flexibility. A highly reliable flexible light-emitting device can be fabricated by transferring the protective film and the organic EL element to the organic resin substrate.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for fabricating a device in which peeling and transfer are performed in the above manner, specifically to a peeling method. In each of
Embodiments Embodiment 2, as a structure example of a device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention, a flexible light-emitting device including an organic EL element will be described. InEmbodiment 3, electronic appliances and lighting devices each including the device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. Lastly, Example of the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention will be described. - In this embodiment, a peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to
FIGS. 1A to 1F ,FIGS. 2A to 2C ,FIGS. 3A to 3D ,FIGS. 4A to 4D ,FIGS. 5A to 5D ,FIGS. 6A to 6D ,FIGS. 7A to 7D ,FIGS. 8A to 8C , andFIGS. 9A to 9I . - The peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- When the layer to be peeled has high tensile stress in the separation of the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, the layer to be peeled is cracked or film breakage is caused in some cases even if peeling can be performed with a small amount of force. In contrast, when the layer to be peeled has high compressive stress in the separation of the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, a large amount of force is required for peeling in some cases. As described above, the yield of peeling is decreased depending on the structure of the layer to be peeled in some cases.
- The present inventors have found out that the force required for peeling depends on the peeling layer as well as the stress on the layer to be peeled.
- In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the peeling layer with a thickness of, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm is used. With such a thin peeling layer, peeling can be performed with a small amount of force, regardless of the stress on the layer to be peeled. In addition, with such a thin peeling layer, the layer to be peeled can be prevented from being cracked when peeled regardless of the stress on the layer to be peeled. In other words, by applying one embodiment of the present invention, the yield of a peeling process can be improved regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
- In the second step of the peeling method, at least a stack that includes the first layer and has stress with a negative value (i.e., compressive stress) is preferably formed as the layer to be peeled. In the case where the stress on the stack included in the layer to be peeled is compressive stress, the layer to be peeled can be prevented from being cracked when peeled.
- The stress on each layer included in the stack is not necessarily compressive stress as long as the stress on the entire stack is compressive stress. The stack may include a layer with tensile stress and a layer with compressive stress.
- The yield of the peeling process can be improved even when N2O plasma treatment is not performed between the first step and the fourth step in the above peeling method. This can simplify a fabrication process of a device fabricated by the peeling method.
- For example, in the case where a tungsten film is used as the peeling layer, a tungsten oxide film can be formed between the tungsten film and the first layer by N2O plasma treatment. The formation of the tungsten oxide film by N2O plasma treatment enables the layer to be peeled to be peeled with a small amount of force.
- In this case, when the tungsten film and the tungsten oxide film are separated at their interface, the tungsten oxide film might remain on the layer to be peeled side. In addition, the remaining tungsten oxide film might adversely affect the characteristics of a transistor. Thus, it is preferable to perform a step of removing the tungsten oxide film after the step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- Since N2O plasma treatment does not need to be performed in the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention as described above, a step of removing a tungsten oxide film is also not performed. Thus, a device can be fabricated more easily.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a bonding layer while the bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer that overlap the bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- By separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form the peeling trigger in the region where the bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the first layer overlap one another, the yield of peeling can be improved.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a peeling method that includes a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate, a second step of forming, on the peeling layer, a layer to be peeled including a first layer in contact with the peeling layer, a third step of curing a first bonding layer and a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer while the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another, a fourth step of separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer overlapped by the second bonding layer to form a peeling trigger, and a fifth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled.
- By separating parts of the peeling layer and parts of the first layer to form the peeling trigger in the region where the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the first layer overlap one another, the yield of peeling can be improved. In addition, the layer to be peeled can be sealed by both the first bonding layer and the second bonding layer; thus, the reliability of a device to be fabricated can be increased.
- Four examples of the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention are described below. In each peeling method, the use of a thin peeling layer with a thickness of less than 10 nm enables a layer to be peeled to be peeled from a formation substrate with a small amount of peeling force regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled.
- It is preferable that the thickness of the entire peeling layer be, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, at least part of the peeling layer may have a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm. Alternatively, preferably 50% or more of the peeling layer, more preferably 90% or more of the peeling layer, may have a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm. In other words, in one embodiment of the present invention, part of the peeling layer may have a thickness of less than 0.1 nm or greater than or equal to 10 nm.
- First, a
peeling layer 103 is formed to a thickness of less than 10 nm over aformation substrate 101, and a layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer 103 (FIG. 1A ). Although an example in which the peeling layer is formed to have an island shape is described here, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. The layer to be peeled 105 may be formed to have an island shape. - In this step, a material of the
peeling layer 103 can be selected such that peeling occurs at the interface between theformation substrate 101 and thepeeling layer 103, the interface between thepeeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105, or in thepeeling layer 103 when the layer to be peeled 105 is peeled from theformation substrate 101. Although an example in which peeling occurs at the interface between the layer to be peeled 105 and thepeeling layer 103 is described in this embodiment, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example depending on the material used for thepeeling layer 103 or the layer to be peeled 105. Note that in the case where the layer to be peeled 105 has a stacked-layer structure, a layer in contact with thepeeling layer 103 is particularly referred to as a first layer. - The thickness of the
peeling layer 103 can be, for example, less than 10 nm, preferably less than or equal to 8 nm, further preferably less than or equal to 5 nm, still further preferably less than or equal to 3 nm. Thepeeling layer 103 is preferably as thin as possible, in which case the yield of peeling can be improved. Alternatively, the thickness of thepeeling layer 103 may be, for example, greater than or equal to 0.1 nm, preferably greater than or equal to 0.5 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 1 nm. Thepeeling layer 103 is preferably as thick as possible, in which case thepeeling layer 103 can be uniform. The thickness of thepeeling layer 103 is preferably, for example, greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 8 nm. In this embodiment, a 5-nm-thick tungsten film is used. - For example, the thickness of the
peeling layer 103 is preferably within the range given above throughout the layer. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, at least part of thepeeling layer 103 may have the thickness in the range given above. Alternatively, preferably 50% or more of thepeeling layer 103, more preferably 90% or more of thepeeling layer 103, may have the thickness in the range given above. In other words, in one embodiment of the present invention, part of thepeeling layer 103 may have a thickness of less than 0.1 mm or greater than or equal to 10 nm. - As the
formation substrate 101, a substrate having at least heat resistance high enough to withstand process temperature in a fabrication process is used. As theformation substrate 101, for example, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a semiconductor substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate, a resin substrate, or a plastic substrate can be used. - Note that it is preferable to use a large-sized glass substrate as the
formation substrate 101 in terms of productivity. For example, a glass substrate having any of the following sizes or a larger size can be used: the 3rd generation (550 mm×650 mm), the 3.5th generation (600 mm×720 mm or 620 mm×750 mm), the 4th generation (680 mm×880 mm or 730 mm×920 mm), the 5th generation (1100 mm×1300 mm), the 6th generation (1500 mm×1850 mm), the 7th generation (1870 mm×2200 mm), the 8th generation (2200 mm×2400 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm×2800 mm or 2450 mm×3050 mm), and the 10th generation (2950 mm×3400 mm). - In the case where a glass substrate is used as the
formation substrate 101, as a base film, an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film is preferably formed between theformation substrate 101 and thepeeling layer 103, in which case contamination from the glass substrate can be prevented. - The
peeling layer 103 can be formed using an element selected from tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), titanium, tantalum, niobium, nickel, cobalt, zirconium, zinc, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, and silicon; an alloy material containing any of the elements; a compound material containing any of the elements; or the like. A crystal structure of a layer containing silicon may be amorphous, microcrystal, or polycrystal. Furthermore, a metal oxide such as aluminum oxide, gallium oxide, zinc oxide, titanium dioxide, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, or an In—Ga—Zn oxide can be used. Thepeeling layer 103 is preferably formed using a high melting point metal material such as tungsten, titanium, or molybdenum, in which case the degree of freedom of the process for forming the layer to be peeled 105 can be increased. - The
peeling layer 103 can be formed by, for example, a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method (e.g., a plasma CVD method, a thermal CVD method, or a metal organic CVD (MOCVD) method), an atomic layer deposition (ALD) method, a coating method (e.g., a spin coating method, a droplet discharge method, or a dispensing method), a printing method, or an evaporation method. - In the case where the
peeling layer 103 has a single-layer structure, a tungsten film, a molybdenum film, or a film containing a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed. Alternatively, a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a film containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum may be formed. Note that the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is, for example, an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum. For example, an alloy film of molybdenum and tungsten with an atomic ratio of Mo:W=3:1, 1:1, or 1:3 may be used. For example, the alloy film of molybdenum and tungsten can be formed by a sputtering method using a metal target with a composition of Mo:W=49:51, 61:39, 14.8:85.2 [wt %]. - The adhesion between the
peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled formed later can be controlled by changing the state of a surface of the tungsten film. For example, the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, nitrous oxide (N2O) plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the film containing tungsten. Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas. - In one embodiment of the present invention, a tungsten film with a thickness of less than 10 nm is used. This enables peeling to be performed easily with a small amount of peeling force; thus, the above plasma treatment or heat treatment does not need to be performed. This can simplify a peeling process and a fabrication process of a device, which is preferable.
- There is no particular limitation on a layer formed as the layer to be peeled 105. In this embodiment, an insulating layer in contact with the
peeling layer 103 is formed on thepeeling layer 103 as the layer to be peeled 105. Furthermore, a functional element may be formed over the insulating layer. For specific examples of the layer formed as the layer to be peeled 105, the description inEmbodiment 2 can also be referred to. - The insulating layer over the
peeling layer 103 preferably has a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride oxide film, and the like. - The insulating layer can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, a coating method, a printing method, an evaporation method, or the like. For example, the insulating layer is formed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. by a plasma CVD method, whereby the insulating layer can be a dense film having an excellent gas barrier property. Note that the thickness of the insulating layer is preferably greater than or equal to 10 nm and less than or equal to 3000 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 1500 nm.
- Next, the layer to be peeled 105 is attached to a
substrate 109 with anbonding layer 107, and thebonding layer 107 is cured (FIG. 1B ).FIG. 1B corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line A1-A2 inFIG. 1C .FIG. 1C is a plan view viewed from thesubstrate 109 side. Note that thesubstrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view. - Here, the
bonding layer 107 is provided so that it is overlapped by thepeeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105. As illustrated inFIGS. 1B and 1C , it is preferable that an end portion of thebonding layer 107 be not more on the outside than an end portion of thepeeling layer 103. -
FIG. 2A illustrates another structure example.FIG. 2A is a plan view viewed from thesubstrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line B1-B2 in the plan view. Note that thesubstrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view. When theformation substrate 101 is attached to thesubstrate 109 with thebonding layer 107 in a region where theformation substrate 101 and thepeeling layer 103 do not overlap each other and thesubstrate 109 and thepeeling layer 103 do not overlap each other like a region surrounded by a dotted line in the cross-sectional view ofFIG. 2A , failure of peeling is likely to occur depending on the area of the region and the degree of adhesion between thebonding layer 107 and a layer in contact with thebonding layer 107. - Thus, it is preferable that the
bonding layer 107 be more on the inside than the peeling layer 103 (FIGS. 1B and 1C ) or the end portion of thebonding layer 107 and the end portion of thepeeling layer 103 be aligned with each other. Thebonding layer 107 is preferably formed using a sheet-like adhesive (adhesive sheet) or a low-fluidity material, in which case thebonding layer 107 does not spread or is less likely to spread outside thepeeling layer 103. -
FIG. 2B is a plan view viewed from thesubstrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line C1-C2 in the plan view. Note that thesubstrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view. As illustrated inFIG. 2B , it is preferable to provide a frame-shapedbonding layer 111 over the layer to be peeled 105 or thepeeling layer 103 and to form thebonding layer 107 in a region surrounded by the frame-shapedbonding layer 111. This can prevent thebonding layer 107 from spreading outside thepeeling layer 103 and the yield of a peeling process from being decreased. The structure illustrated inFIG. 2B is preferably employed, in which case a liquid adhesive can be used for the bonding layer and the range of materials for the bonding layer can be expanded. - It is particularly preferable that an end portion of the frame-shaped
bonding layer 111 be more on the inside than the end portion of thepeeling layer 103. This enables the end portion of thebonding layer 107 to be also more on the inside than the end portion of thepeeling layer 103. Note that the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 and the end portion of thepeeling layer 103 may overlap each other. - The formation order of the frame-shaped
bonding layer 111 and thebonding layer 107 is not limited. For example, thebonding layer 107 may be formed by a screen printing method or the like, and then the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 may be foamed by a coating method or the like. Alternatively, the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 may be formed by a coating method or the like, and then thebonding layer 107 may be formed using an apparatus for a one drop fill (ODF) method or the like. - As illustrated in
FIG. 2C , aresin layer 113 may be provided outside the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 or thebonding layer 107.FIG. 2C is a plan view viewed from thesubstrate 109 side and a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line D1-D2 in the plan view. Note that thesubstrate 109 is not illustrated in the plan view. Theresin layer 113 can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the layer to be peeled 105 even when the device under manufacture is exposed to an air atmosphere during the fabrication process. - Note that the layer to be peeled 105 and the
substrate 109 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere. - As the
bonding layer 107, a variety of curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used. Examples of these adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin. A material with low moisture permeability, such as an epoxy resin, is particularly preferable. Alternatively, a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used. Alternatively, a sheet-like adhesive may be used. - The resin may include a drying agent. As the drying agent, for example, a substance that adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used. Alternatively, a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption, such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used. The drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can suppress deterioration of the functional element due to entry of moisture in the air and can improve the reliability of the device.
- In addition, it is preferable to mix a filler with a high refractive index or light-scattering member into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved. For example, titanium oxide, barium oxide, zeolite, zirconium, or the like can be used.
- Alternatively, an adhesive with which the
substrate 109 and the layer to be peeled 105 can be chemically or physically separated when necessary, such as an adhesive that is soluble in water or a solvent or an adhesive that is capable of being plasticized upon irradiation of UV light, can be used for thebonding layer 107. For example, a water-soluble resin may be used. - As the
substrate 109, a variety of substrates that can be used as theformation substrate 101 can be used. Alternatively, a film-like flexible substrate may be used. - Materials that can be used for the frame-shaped
bonding layer 111 and theresin layer 113 are the same as the material that can be used for thebonding layer 107. - The frame-shaped
bonding layer 111 may be in any of a cured state, a semi-cured state, and uncured state as long as thebonding layer 107 can be prevented from spreading outside thepeeling layer 103. In the case where the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 is in a cured state, a peeling trigger, which is described later, is preferably formed in a region overlapping the frame-shapedbonding layer 111. This enables the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 together with thebonding layer 107 to be used as a layer for sealing the layer to be peeled 105 after peeling, which prevents deterioration of the functional element due to entry of moisture in the air. Thus, a highly reliable device can be fabricated. Note that when the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 is cured, it is preferable that an end portion of the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 be not more on the outside than the end portion of thepeeling layer 103 in order to prevent a decrease in the yield of the peeling process. - In the case where a photocurable resin is used for the
bonding layer 107 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 111, light for curing the photocurable resin needs to be transmitted through the formation substrate, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled. Note that depending on the material, the peeling layer with too large thickness has a low light-transmitting property as in the case of using a metal film such as a tungsten film; thus, light for curing a photocurable resin hardly passes through the peeling layer. This causes a problem in that, for example, a photocurable resin is not cured or it takes a long time to cure a photocurable resin. Since the peeling layer with a small thickness of less than 10 nm is used in one embodiment of the present invention, the following advantages are obtained: the bonding layer can be reliably cured or the bonding layer can be cured in a short time, and a wide range of materials can be used for the peeling layer. - Moreover, when the
resin layer 113 is in a cured state, the yield of a subsequent peeling process might be decreased because of the degree of adhesion between theformation substrate 101 and thesubstrate 109. Thus, at least part of theresin layer 113 is preferably in a semi-cured state or an uncured state. With the use of a material having high viscosity for theresin layer 113, an effect of preventing entry of impurities such as moisture in the air into the layer to be peeled 105 can be increased even when theresin layer 113 is in a semi-cured state or an uncured state. - For example, a photocurable resin is used for the
resin layer 113 and is partly irradiated with light, so that part of theresin layer 113 is cured. Part of theresin layer 113 is preferably cured, in which case the gap between theformation substrate 101 and thesubstrate 109 and the positions thereof can remain unchanged even when the device under manufacture is moved from a reduced-pressure atmosphere to the air atmosphere during the process. - Next, a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation (
FIGS. 1B and 1D ). - Laser light irradiation is preferably employed, in which case the substrate does not need to be, for example, cut to form a peeling trigger and generation of dust or the like can be prevented.
- A region where the cured
bonding layer 107, the layer to be peeled 105, and thepeeling layer 103 overlap each other is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P1 inFIG. 1B ). In the case where the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 is in a cured state inFIGS. 2B and 2C , a region where the frame-shapedbonding layer 111, the layer to be peeled 105, and thepeeling layer 103 overlap each other is preferably irradiated with laser light. - Although laser light irradiation may be performed from either substrate side, it is preferable to perform laser light irradiation from the
formation substrate 101 side on which thepeeling layer 103 is provided so that irradiation of the functional element or the like with scattered light can be suppressed. Note that a material that transmits the laser light is used for the substrate on the side where laser light irradiation is performed. - Part of the first layer (a layer that is included in the layer to be peeled 105 and is in contact with the peeling layer 103) can be removed and the peeling trigger (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in
FIG. 1D ) can be formed by cracking at least part of the first layer or causing film breakage. At this time, not only the first layer but also thepeeling layer 103, thebonding layer 107, or another layer included in the layer to be peeled 105 may be partly removed. Laser light irradiation enables part of the films to be dissolved, evaporated, or thermally broken. A method for forming the peeling trigger is not limited as long as at least part of the first layer is peeled from the peeling layer, and part of the first layer is not necessarily removed. - In the peeling process, the force of separating the layer to be peeled 105 and the
peeling layer 103 is preferably concentrated at the peeling trigger; thus, it is preferable to form the peeling trigger not at the center portion of thebonding layer 107 in a cured state but in the vicinity of the end portion of thebonding layer 107. It is particularly preferable to form the peeling trigger in the vicinity of the corner portion compared to the vicinity of the side portion among the vicinities of the end portion. - The peeling trigger is preferably formed in the form of a solid line or a dashed line by continuously or intermittently irradiating the vicinity of the end portion of the
bonding layer 107 with laser light, in which case peeling is performed easily. - There is no particular limitation on a laser used to form a peeling trigger. For example, a continuous wave laser or a pulsed oscillation laser can be used. Note that the conditions for laser light irradiation such as frequency, power density, energy density, and beam profile are controlled as appropriate in consideration of the thicknesses, the materials, or the like of the
formation substrate 101 and thepeeling layer 103. - Then, the layer to be peeled 105 and the
formation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger (FIGS. 1E and 1F ). As a result, the layer to be peeled 105 can be transferred from theformation substrate 101 to thesubstrate 109. At this time, one of the substrates is preferably fixed to a suction stage or the like. For example, theformation substrate 101 may be fixed to the suction stage to peel the layer to be peeled 105 from theformation substrate 101. Alternatively, thesubstrate 109 may be fixed to a suction stage to peel theformation substrate 101 from thesubstrate 109. Note that thebonding layer 107 that is more on the outside than the peeling trigger remains on at least one of theformation substrate 101 and thesubstrate 109. AlthoughFIGS. 1E and 1F illustrate an example in which thebonding layer 107 remains on both substrates, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. - For example, the layer to be peeled 105 and the
formation substrate 101 may be separated by mechanical force (a peeling process with a human hand or a gripper, a peeling process by rotation of a roller, or the like) from the peeling trigger. - The
formation substrate 101 and the layer to be peeled 105 may be separated by filling the interface between thepeeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 with liquid such as water. A portion between thepeeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 absorbs a liquid through capillarity action, so that thepeeling layer 103 can be separated easily. Furthermore, an adverse effect on the functional element included in the layer to be peeled 105 due to static electricity caused at the time of peeling (e.g., a phenomenon in which a semiconductor element is damaged by static electricity) can be suppressed. Note that liquid can be sprayed in the faun of mist or steam. As the liquid, pure water, an organic solvent, a neutral, alkaline, or acid aqueous solution, an aqueous solution in which a salt is dissolved, or the like can be used. - Note that after the peeling, the
bonding layer 107, the frame-shapedbonding layer 111, theresin layer 113, and the like that remain on thesubstrate 109 and does not contribute to attachment of the layer to be peeled 105 and thesubstrate 109 may be removed. Such removal is preferable because an adverse effect on the functional element in a subsequent step (e.g., entry of impurities) can be suppressed. An unnecessary resin can be removed by, for example, wiping or cleaning. - In the above-described peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation and then the interface between the
peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 is made in a state where peeling is easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process. - First, in the same manner as
Peeling Method 1, thepeeling layer 103 with a thickness of less than 10 nm is formed over theformation substrate 101, and the layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer 103 (FIG. 1A ). Then, the layer to be peeled 105 is attached to thesubstrate 109 with thebonding layer 107 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 111, and thebonding layer 107 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 are cured (FIG. 3A ). - Next, a peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife such as a cutter knife (
FIGS. 3A and 3B ). - In the case where the
substrate 109 on the side where thepeeling layer 103 is not provided can be cut by a knife or the like, a cut may be made in thesubstrate 109, thebonding layer 107 or the frame-shapedbonding layer 111, and the layer to be peeled 105 (see arrows P2 inFIG. 3A ). This enables parts of the first layer to be removed to form peeling triggers (see regions surrounded by dotted lines inFIG. 3B ). Here, an example in which the peeling trigger in the form of a solid line is formed by making a cut in a region where the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 in a cured state and thepeeling layer 103 overlap each other; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to such an example. Note that a cut may be made in thepeeling layer 103. - Then, the layer to be peeled 105 and the
formation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger (FIGS. 3C and 3D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 105 to be transferred from theformation substrate 101 to thesubstrate 109. - In the above-described peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is faulted by a sharp knife or the like and then the interface between the
peeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process. Moreover, owing to the peeling from the region where the frame-shapedbonding layer 111 in a cured state and thepeeling layer 103 overlap each other, the layer to be peeled 105 can be double sealed by thebonding layer 107 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 111. Therefore, even when an organic EL element or the like that is likely to deteriorate due to moisture or the like is formed in the layer to be peeled 105, a highly reliable light-emitting device can be fabricated. - First, a
peeling layer 203 with a thickness of less than 10 nm is formed over aformation substrate 201, and a layer to be peeled 205 is formed over the peeling layer 203 (FIG. 4A ). In addition, apeeling layer 223 is formed over aformation substrate 221, and a layer to be peeled 225 is formed over the peeling layer 223 (FIG. 4B ). - Next, the
formation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221 are attached to each other with abonding layer 207 and a frame-shapedbonding layer 211 so that surfaces on which the layers to be peeled are formed face each other, and then thebonding layer 207 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 are cured (FIG. 4C ). Here, the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 and thebonding layer 207 that is more on the inside than the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 are provided over the layer to be peeled 225, and then theformation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221 are made to face each other and attached to each other. - Note that the
formation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere. - Note that although
FIG. 4C illustrates the case where thepeeling layer 203 and thepeeling layer 223 have different sizes, the peeling layers may have the same size as illustrated inFIG. 4D . - The
bonding layer 207 is positioned so as to be overlapped by thepeeling layer 203 and the layer to be peeled 205 and to overlap the layer to be peeled 225 and thepeeling layer 223. Then, an end portion of thebonding layer 207 is preferably more on the inside than at least an end portion of either thepeeling layer 203 or the peeling layer 223 (the peeling layer that is desirably peeled first). This can prevent strong adhesion between theformation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221; thus, a decrease in the yield of a subsequent peeling process can be suppressed. - Next, a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation (
FIGS. 5A and 5B ). - Either the
formation substrate 201 or theformation substrate 221 may be peeled first. In the case where the peeling layers have different sizes, a substrate over which a larger peeling layer is formed may be peeled first or a substrate over which a smaller peeling layer is formed may be peeled first. In the case where an element such as a semiconductor element, a light-emitting element, or a display element is formed only over one of the substrates, the substrate on the side where the element is formed may be peeled first or the other substrate may be peeled first. Here, an example in which theformation substrate 201 is peeled first is described. - A region where the
bonding layer 207 in a cured state or the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 in a cured state, the layer to be peeled 205, and thepeeling layer 203 overlap one another is irradiated with laser light. Described here as an example is the case where thebonding layer 207 is in a cured state and the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 is not in a cured state, and thebonding layer 207 in a cured state is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P3 inFIG. 5A ). - Part of the first layer is removed, so that a peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line in
FIG. 5B ). At this time, not only the first layer but also thepeeling layer 203, thebonding layer 207, or another layer included in the layer to be peeled 205 may be partly removed. - It is preferable that laser light irradiation be performed from the substrate side where the peeling layer that is desirably peeled is provided. In the case where a region where the
peeling layer 203 and thepeeling layer 223 overlap each other is irradiated with laser light, theformation substrate 201 and thepeeling layer 203 can be selectively separated by cracking only the layer to be peeled 205 and not the layer to be peeled 225 (see a region surrounded by a dotted line inFIG. 5B ). - When a peeling trigger is formed in both the layer to be peeled 205 on the
peeling layer 203 side and the layer to be peeled 225 on thepeeling layer 223 side in the case where the region where thepeeling layer 203 and thepeeling layer 223 overlap each other is irradiated with laser light, it might be difficult to selectively separate one of the formation substrates. Thus, laser light irradiation conditions might be restricted so that only one of the layers to be peeled is cracked. - In the case of a structure illustrated in
FIG. 8A , a peeling trigger can be prevented from being formed in both thepeeling layer 203 and thepeeling layer 223 by irradiating a region that is overlapped by thepeeling layer 203 and does not overlap thepeeling layer 223 with laser light (FIGS. 8B and 8C ). This can ease restriction on the laser light irradiation conditions, which is preferable. Although laser light irradiation may be performed from either substrate side in that case, it is preferable to perform laser irradiation from theformation substrate 201 side where thepeeling layer 203 is provided so that irradiation of the functional element or the like with scattered light can be prevented. - Then, the layer to be peeled 205 and the
formation substrate 201 are separated from the formed peeling trigger (FIGS. 5C and 5D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 205 to be transferred from theformation substrate 201 to theformation substrate 221. Note that thebonding layer 207 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 that are formed more on the outside than the peeling trigger remain on at least one of theformation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221.FIGS. 5C and 5D illustrate an example in which thebonding layer 207 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 211 remain on both sides, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. - Next, the exposed layer to be peeled 205 is attached to a
substrate 231 with abonding layer 233, and thebonding layer 233 is cured (FIG. 6A ). Here, a frame-shapedbonding layer 235 and thebonding layer 233 surrounded by the frame-shapedbonding layer 235 are provided over the layer to be peeled 225, and then the layer to be peeled 225 and theflexible substrate 231 are attached to each other. - Note that the layer to be peeled 205 and the
substrate 231 are preferably attached to each other in a reduced-pressure atmosphere. - Next, a peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation (
FIGS. 6B and 6C ). - Described here as an example is the case where the
bonding layer 233 is in a cured state and the frame-shapedbonding layer 235 is not in a cured state, and thebonding layer 233 in a cured state is irradiated with laser light (see an arrow P4 inFIG. 6B ). Part of the first layer is removed, so that a peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line inFIG. 6C ). At this time, not only the first layer but also thepeeling layer 223, thebonding layer 233, or another layer included in the layer to be peeled 225 may be partly removed. - It is preferable that laser light irradiation be performed from the
formation substrate 221 side where thepeeling layer 223 is provided. - Then, the layer to be peeled 225 and the
formation substrate 221 are separated from the formed peeling trigger (FIG. 6D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 205 and the layer to be peeled 225 to be transferred to thesubstrate 231. - In the above-described peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, peeling is performed after the following steps: the pair of formation substrates each provided with the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled are attached to each other, the peeling trigger is formed by laser light irradiation, and then the interface between each peeling layer and each layer to be peeled is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- Alternatively, attachment of a substrate included in a device that is desirably fabricated can be performed after the following steps: a pair of formation substrates each provided with a layer to be peeled are attached to each other, and peeling is performed. This means that formation substrates having low flexibility can be used for attaching the layers to be peeled to each other. Thus, the alignment accuracy at the time of attachment can be improved as compared to the case where flexible substrates are attached to each other.
- In
Peeling Method 4, steps up to the first peeling process are the same as those inPeeling Method 3. Steps after the step inFIG. 5D is described below in detail. - The layer to be peeled 205 that is peeled from the
formation substrate 201 in the step illustrated inFIG. 5D is attached to thesubstrate 231 with thebonding layer 233, and thebonding layer 233 is cured (FIG. 7A ). - Next, a peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife such as a cutter knife (FIGS. 7B and 7C).
- In the case where the
substrate 231 on the side where thepeeling layer 223 is not provided can be cut by a sharp knife or the like, the cut may be made in thesubstrate 231, thebonding layer 233, and the layer to be peeled 225 (see arrows P5 inFIG. 7B ). This enables part of the first layer to be removed; thus, the peeling trigger can be formed (see a region surrounded by a dotted line inFIG. 7C ). - As illustrated in
FIGS. 7B and 7C , in the case where theformation substrate 221 and thesubstrate 231 are attached to each other with thebonding layer 233 in a region where the substrates and thepeeling layer 223 do not overlap each other, the yield of a subsequent peeling process might be decreased depending on the degree of adhesion between theformation substrate 221 and thesubstrate 231. Thus, it is preferable to make a cut in the form of a frame shape in a region where thebonding layer 233 in a cured state and thepeeling layer 223 overlap each other to form a peeling trigger in the form of a solid line. This can improve the yield of the peeling process. - Then, the layer to be peeled 225 and the
formation substrate 221 are separated from the formed peeling trigger (FIG. 7D ). This enables the layer to be peeled 225 to be transferred from theformation substrate 221 to thesubstrate 231. - In the above-described peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, peeling is performed in such a manner that the peeling trigger is formed by a sharp knife or the like and then the interface between the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled is made in a state where peeling can be easily performed. This can improve the yield of the peeling process.
- Bonding of a substrate over which a device that is desirably fabricated can be performed after the following steps: a pair of formation substrates each provided with a layer to be peeled are attached to each other and then peeling is performed. This means that formation substrates having low flexibility can be used for attaching the layers to be peeled to each other. Thus, the alignment accuracy at the time of attachment can be improved as compared to the case where flexible substrates are attached to each other.
- In each of the above-described peeling methods, an end portion of a region that can be peeled and transferred is more on the inside than the end portion of the
peeling layer 103. Thepeeling layer 103 and the layer to be peeled 105 are formed so that an end portion of the layer to be peeled 105 is more on the inside than an end portion of thepeeling layer 103 as illustrated inFIGS. 9A to 9C . In the case where there are a plurality of layers to be peeled 105, thepeeling layer 103 may be provided for each of the layers to be peeled 105 as illustrated inFIG. 9B , or a plurality of layers to be peeled 105 may be provided over onepeeling layer 103 as illustrated inFIG. 9C . - As described above, the use of any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention enables a layer to be peeled to be peeled with a small amount of force and the layer to be peeled to be prevented from being cracked when peeled regardless of the structure of the layer to be peeled. Thus, a decrease in the yield of the peeling process can be suppressed.
- This embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a flexible light-emitting device that can be fabricated according to one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to
FIGS. 10A to 10C ,FIGS. 11A to 11C , FIGS. 12A1, 12A2, 12B, and 12C,FIGS. 13A and 13B , and FIGS. 14A1, 14A2, 14B, and 14C. -
FIGS. 10A to 10C ,FIGS. 11A to 11C , FIGS. 12A1, 12A2, 12B, and 12C,FIGS. 13A and 13B , and FIGS. 14A1, 14A2, 14B, and 14C illustrate examples of flexible light-emitting devices each including an organic EL element as a light-emitting element. The flexible light-emitting devices of embodiments of the present invention can be bent with a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm. The direction in which the light-emitting device is bent is not limited. The number of bent portions may be one or more than one. For example, the light-emitting device can be folded in two or three. - A light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes, for example, a first flexible substrate, a second flexible substrate, a light-emitting element between the first flexible substrate and the second flexible substrate, a first insulating layer between the first flexible substrate and the light-emitting element, and a first bonding layer between the second flexible substrate and the light-emitting element. The light-emitting element includes a layer containing a light-emitting organic compound between a pair of electrodes. The water vapor transmission rate of the first insulating layer is less than 1×10−5 g/m2·day.
- In the light-emitting device, it is preferable that a second insulating layer be provided between the second flexible substrate and the first bonding layer and the water vapor transmission rate of the second insulating layer be less than 1×10−5 g/m2·day. In addition, it is preferable to form a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer in the light-emitting device.
- Note that the light-emitting device in this specification includes, in its category, a display device using a light-emitting element. Furthermore, the category of the light-emitting device in this specification includes a module in which a light-emitting element is provided with a connector such as an anisotropic conductive film or a tape carrier package (TCP); a module having a TCP at the tip of which a printed wiring board is provided; and a module in which an integrated circuit (IC) is directly mounted on a light-emitting element by a chip on glass (COG) method. The category also includes light-emitting devices used in lighting equipment and the like.
-
FIG. 10A is a plan view of a light-emitting device, andFIGS. 10B and 10C are each an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X1-Y1 inFIG. 10A . The light-emitting devices illustrated inFIGS. 10A to 10C are bottom-emission light-emitting devices. - The light-emitting devices in
FIGS. 10B and 10C each include aflexible substrate 419, anadhesive layer 422, an insulatinglayer 424, aconductive layer 406, aconductive layer 416, an insulatinglayer 405, an organic EL element 450 (afirst electrode 401, anEL layer 402, and a second electrode 403), abonding layer 407, and aflexible substrate 428. Thefirst electrode 401, the insulatinglayer 424, theadhesive layer 422, and theflexible substrate 419 transmit visible light. - The
organic EL element 450 is provided over theflexible substrate 419 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 is sealed by theflexible substrate 419, thebonding layer 407, and theflexible substrate 428. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. It is preferable that thesecond electrode 403 reflect visible light. - End portions of the
first electrode 401, theconductive layer 406, and theconductive layer 416 are covered with the insulatinglayer 405. Theconductive layer 406 is electrically connected to thefirst electrode 401, and theconductive layer 416 is electrically connected to thesecond electrode 403. Theconductive layer 406 covered with the insulatinglayer 405 with thefirst electrode 401 therebetween functions as an auxiliary wiring and is electrically connected to thefirst electrode 401. It is preferable that the auxiliary wiring be electrically connected to the electrode of the organic EL element, in which case a voltage drop due to the electrical resistance of the electrode can be inhibited. Note that theconductive layer 406 may be provided over thefirst electrode 401. Furthermore, an auxiliary wiring that is electrically connected to thesecond electrode 403 may be provided, for example, over the insulatinglayer 405. - To increase the light outcoupling efficiency of the light-emitting device, a light outcoupling structure is preferably provided on the side from which light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted.
FIG. 10B illustrates an example in which theflexible substrate 419 from which the light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted also serves as the light outcoupling structure. Note that in the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention, a touch sensor or the light outcoupling structure such as a sheet having a function of diffusing light may be provided so as to be overlapped by the flexible substrate. Moreover, a polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be provided.FIG. 10C illustrates a case where adiffusion plate 411 and atouch sensor 413 are provided so as to be overlapped by theflexible substrate 419. A touch sensor or the like can be provided also in each structure described below. - The insulating
layer 424 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent moisture and oxygen from entering the light-emitting device from theflexible substrate 419 side. - In this specification, the gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the layer having an excellent gas barrier property is, for example, less than or equal to 1×10−5 [g/m2·day], preferably less than or equal to 1×10−6 [g/m2·day], further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−7 [g/m2·day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−8 [g/m2·day].
- The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 1 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 1 orPeeling Method 2 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424 is formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulatinglayer 424 can be formed at a high temperature. By using the layer that is formed at a high temperature and has an excellent gas barrier property as the insulatinglayer 424, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. Note that theorganic EL element 450 or the like as well as the insulatinglayer 424 may be formed as a layer to be peeled. -
FIG. 11A is a plan view of a light-emitting device, andFIGS. 11B and 11C are each an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X2-Y2 inFIG. 11A . The light-emitting devices illustrated inFIGS. 11A to 11C are top-emission light-emitting devices. - The light-emitting devices in
FIGS. 11B and 11C each include aflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, aconductive layer 408, the insulatinglayer 405, the organic EL element 450 (thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402, and the second electrode 403), aconductive layer 410, a frame-shapedbonding layer 404, thebonding layer 407, theflexible substrate 428, and alight outcoupling structure 409. Thesecond electrode 403, thebonding layer 407, theflexible substrate 428, and thelight outcoupling structure 409 transmit visible light. - The
organic EL element 450 is provided over theflexible substrate 420 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 is sealed by theflexible substrate 420, thebonding layer 407, the frame-shapedbonding layer 404, and theflexible substrate 428. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. It is preferable that thefirst electrode 401 reflect visible light. Thelight outcoupling structure 409 is attached to a surface of theflexible substrate 428. - End portions of the
first electrode 401 and theconductive layer 410 are covered with the insulatinglayer 405. Theconductive layer 410 can be formed using the same process and material as those of thefirst electrode 401 and is electrically connected to thesecond electrode 403. - The
conductive layer 408 over the insulatinglayer 405 functions as an auxiliary wiring and is electrically connected to thesecond electrode 403. Theconductive layer 408 is provided over thesecond electrode 403. Furthermore, as in Structure Example 1, an auxiliary wiring that is electrically connected to thefirst electrode 401 may be provided. - Here, the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the light-emitting element sealed by the pair of flexible substrates and the bonding layers.
- The bonding layer is not covered at a side surface of the light-emitting device. For this reason, impurities such as moisture and oxygen enter the organic EL element from the outside when the bonding layer has a poor gas barrier property. The entry of impurities into the organic EL element causes, for example, shrinkage of a light-emitting portion (here, luminance degradation from an end portion of the light-emitting portion or an increase in a non-light-emitting region in the light-emitting portion). Thus, the bonding layer that covers the organic EL element preferably has an excellent gas barrier property (in particular, low water vapor and oxygen transmission rates).
- In the case where a liquid composition whose volume is greatly reduced by curing is used as a material of the bonding layer, stress is applied to the organic EL element, which might damage the organic EL element and cause poor light emission. Thus, a reduction in the volume due to curing of a material used for the bonding layer is preferably as small as possible.
- In the case where the bonding layer is positioned on the side from which light emitted from the organic EL element is extracted, the light-transmitting property of the bonding layer is preferably high so that the light outcoupling efficiency of the light-emitting device is increased. For a similar purpose, the refractive index of the bonding layer is preferably high.
- There are a plurality of properties that are required for the bonding layer as described above, and it is very difficult for a material of the bonding layer to exhibit two or more of those properties.
- In view of the above, the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention includes two or more kinds of bonding layers between a flexible substrate and an organic EL element. Specifically, for example, one bonding layer having a more excellent gas barrier property than the other bonding layer surrounds the other. A material of the outer bonding layer has a more excellent gas barrier property than a material of the inner bonding layer. Thus, even when a material having a poor gas barrier property and having a small reduction in volume due to curing, a high light-transmitting property (particularly, visible light transmittance), or a high refractive index is used for the inner bonding layer, for example, moisture and oxygen can be prevented from entering the light-emitting device from the outside. Thus, a highly reliable light-emitting device in which shrinkage of a light-emitting portion is suppressed can be obtained.
- The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 2 includes the
bonding layer 407 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 surrounding thebonding layer 407, between theflexible substrate 428 and theorganic EL element 450. - The frame-shaped
bonding layer 404 preferably has a more excellent gas barrier property than thebonding layer 407. The gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 is, for example, less than or equal to 1×10−5 [g/m2·day], preferably less than or equal to 1×10−6 [g/m2·day], further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−7 [g/m2·day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−8 [g/m2·day]. - In Structure Example 2, light emitted from the
organic EL element 450 is extracted from the light-emitting device through thebonding layer 407. For this reason, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. In addition, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. Furthermore, the volume of thebonding layer 407 is preferably less reduced by curing than that of the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. - The frame-shaped
bonding layer 404 and thebonding layer 407 may be in contact with theflexible substrate 428 as illustrated inFIG. 11B , or the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 is not necessarily in contact with theflexible substrate 428 as illustrated inFIG. 11C . In addition, the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 may be positioned in an end portion of the light-emitting device as illustrated inFIG. 11B , or the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 and thebonding layer 407 may be positioned in the end portion of the light-emitting device as illustrated inFIG. 11C . - The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 2 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 1 orPeeling Method 2 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424 is formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulatinglayer 424 can be formed at a high temperature. By using the layer that is formed at a high temperature and has an excellent gas barrier property as the insulatinglayer 424, the light-emitting device can have high reliability. Note that theorganic EL element 450 or the like as well as the insulatinglayer 424 may be formed as a layer to be peeled. - FIG. 12A1 is a plan view of a light-emitting device, and
FIG. 12B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X3-Y3 in FIG. 12A1. The light-emitting device illustrated inFIG. 12B is a top-emission light-emitting device using a separate coloring method. In this embodiment, the light-emitting device can have a structure in which light-emitting units of three colors of, for example, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) express one color, a structure in which light-emitting units of four colors of R, G, B, and white (W) express one color, or the like. The color element is not particularly limited and colors other than R, G, B, and W may be used. For example, yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like may be used. - The light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 12A1 includes a light-emitting
portion 491, adriver circuit portion 493, and a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 495. An organic EL element and a transistor included in the light-emittingportion 491 and thedriver circuit portion 493 are sealed by theflexible substrate 420, theflexible substrate 428, the frame-shapedbonding layer 404, and thebonding layer 407.FIG. 12B illustrates an example in which theconductive layer 457 and aconnector 497 are connected to each other through an opening in the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. - The light-emitting device illustrated in
FIG. 12B includes theflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, atransistor 455, an insulatinglayer 463, an insulatinglayer 465, the insulatinglayer 405, the organic EL element 450 (thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402, and the second electrode 403), the frame-shapedbonding layer 404, thebonding layer 407, theflexible substrate 428, and theconductive layer 457. Theflexible substrate 428, thebonding layer 407, and thesecond electrode 403 transmit visible light. - In the light-emitting
portion 491 of the light-emitting device inFIG. 12B , thetransistor 455 and theorganic EL element 450 are provided over theflexible substrate 420 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401 over the insulatinglayer 465, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. Thefirst electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of thetransistor 455. It is preferable that thefirst electrode 401 reflect visible light. The end portion of thefirst electrode 401 is covered with the insulatinglayer 405. - The
driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.FIG. 12B illustrates one of the transistors in thedriver circuit portion 493. - The
conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal (e.g., a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, and a reset signal) or a potential from the outside is transmitted to thedriver circuit portion 493. Here, an example in which theFPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described. - To prevent an increase in the number of fabrication steps, the
conductive layer 457 is preferably formed using the same material and step as those of the electrode or the wiring in the light-emitting portion or the driver circuit portion. Here, an example in which theconductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in the transistor is described. - The insulating
layer 463 has an effect of suppressing diffusion of impurities into a semiconductor included in the transistor. As the insulatinglayer 465, an insulating layer having a planarization function is preferably selected in order to reduce surface unevenness due to the transistor. - The frame-shaped
bonding layer 404 preferably has a more excellent gas barrier property than thebonding layer 407 to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from the outside into the light-emitting device. Thus, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. - In Structure Example 3, light emitted from the
organic EL element 450 is extracted from the light-emitting device through thebonding layer 407. For this reason, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. In addition, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. Furthermore, it is preferable that the volume of thebonding layer 407 be less reduced by curing than that of the frame-shapedbonding layer 404. - The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 3 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 1 orPeeling Method 2 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistor are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistor can be formed at a high temperature. By using the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistor that are formed at a high temperature, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. Note that theorganic EL element 450 or the like may be further formed as a layer to be peeled. - FIG. 12A2 is a plan view of the light-emitting device, and
FIG. 12C is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X4-Y4 in FIG. 12A2. The light-emitting device illustrated inFIG. 12C is a bottom-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method. - The light-emitting device illustrated in
FIG. 12C includes theflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, atransistor 454, thetransistor 455, the insulatinglayer 463, acoloring layer 432, the insulatinglayer 465, aconductive layer 435, an insulatinglayer 467, the insulatinglayer 405, the organic EL element 450 (thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402, and the second electrode 403), thebonding layer 407, theflexible substrate 428, and aconductive layer 457. Theflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, the insulatinglayer 463, the insulatinglayer 465, the insulatinglayer 467, and thefirst electrode 401 transmit visible light. - In the light-emitting
portion 491 of the light-emitting device illustrated inFIG. 12C , the switchingtransistor 454, thecurrent control transistor 455, and theorganic EL element 450 are provided over theflexible substrate 420 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401 over the insulatinglayer 467, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. Thefirst electrode 401 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of thetransistor 455 through theconductive layer 435. The end portion of thefirst electrode 401 is covered with the insulatinglayer 405. It is preferable that thesecond electrode 403 reflect visible light. Moreover, the light-emitting device includes thecoloring layer 432 overlapped by theorganic EL element 450 over the insulatinglayer 463. - The
driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.FIG. 12C illustrates two of the transistors in thedriver circuit portion 493. - The
conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to thedriver circuit portion 493. Here, an example in which theFPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described. Moreover, here, an example in which theconductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of theconductive layer 435 is described. - The insulating
layer 463 has an effect of suppressing diffusion of impurities into a semiconductor included in the transistor. As the insulatinglayer 465 and the insulatinglayer 467, an insulating layer having a planarization function is preferably selected in order to reduce surface unevenness due to the transistors and wirings. - Note that a touch sensor may be provided so as to be overlapped by the
flexible substrate 420 as illustrated inFIG. 13A . The touch sensor includes aconductive layer 441, aconductive layer 442, and an insulatinglayer 443. As illustrated inFIG. 13B , aflexible substrate 444 may be provided between theflexible substrate 420 and the touch sensor. Note that the touch sensor may be provided between theflexible substrate 420 and theflexible substrate 444. AnFPC 445 for the touch sensor may also be provided. - The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 4 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 1 orPeeling Method 2 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistors are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate, so that the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistors can be formed at a high temperature. By using the insulatinglayer 424 and the transistors that are formed at a high temperature, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. Note that theorganic EL element 450 or the like may be further formed as a layer to be peeled. - FIG. 14A1 is a plan view of a light-emitting device, and
FIG. 14B is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X5-Y5 in FIG. 14A1. The light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14A1 is a top-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method. - The light-emitting device illustrated in
FIG. 14B includes theflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, thetransistor 455, the insulatinglayer 463, the insulatinglayer 465, the insulatinglayer 405, aspacer 496, the organic EL element 450 (thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402, and the second electrode 403), thebonding layer 407, anovercoat 453, a light-blocking layer 431, thecoloring layer 432, an insulatinglayer 226, anadhesive layer 426, theflexible substrate 428, and aconductive layer 457. Theflexible substrate 428, theadhesive layer 426, the insulatinglayer 226, thebonding layer 407, theovercoat 453, and thesecond electrode 403 transmit visible light. - In the light-emitting
portion 491 of the light-emitting device inFIG. 14B , thetransistor 455 and theorganic EL element 450 are provided over theflexible substrate 420 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401 over the insulatinglayer 465, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. Thefirst electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of thetransistor 455. The end portion of thefirst electrode 401 is covered with the insulatinglayer 405. It is preferable that thefirst electrode 401 reflect visible light. Thespacer 496 is provided over the insulatinglayer 405. Thespacer 496 can adjust the gap between theflexible substrates - In addition, the light-emitting device includes the
coloring layer 432 that overlaps theorganic EL element 450 with thebonding layer 407 therebetween, and the light-blocking layer 431 that overlaps the insulatinglayer 405 with thebonding layer 407 therebetween. - The
driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.FIG. 14B illustrates one of the transistors in thedriver circuit portion 493. - The
conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to thedriver circuit portion 493. Here, an example in which theFPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described. Moreover, here, an example in which theconductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in thetransistor 455 is described. - In the light-emitting device illustrated in
FIGS. 14B , theFPC 495 overlaps theflexible substrate 428. Theconnector 497 is connected to theconductive layer 457 through an opening in theflexible substrate 428, theadhesive layer 426, the insulatinglayer 226, thebonding layer 407, the insulatinglayer 465, and the insulatinglayer 463. Moreover, theconnector 497 is connected to theFPC 495. TheFPC 495 and theconductive layer 457 are electrically connected to each other through theconnector 497. In the case where theflexible substrate 428 overlaps theconductive layer 457, theconductive layer 457, theconnector 497, and theFPC 495 can be electrically connected to one another by forming an opening in the flexible substrate 428 (or using a flexible substrate having an opening). - The insulating
layer 424 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from theflexible substrate 420 side into the light-emitting device. Similarly, the insulatinglayer 226 preferably has an excellent gas barrier property to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen from theflexible substrate 428 side into the light-emitting device. - The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 5 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 3 orPeeling Method 4 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424, the transistors, theorganic EL element 450, and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate. In addition, over another formation substrate, the insulatinglayer 226, thecoloring layer 432, the light-blocking layer 431, and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled. After the two formation substrates are attached to each other, the layer to be peeled and the formation substrate are separated and the layer to be peeled and a flexible substrate are attached to each other with the adhesive layer, so that the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 5 can be fabricated. - In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, an insulating layer and a transistor can be formed over a formation substrate at a high temperature. By using the insulating
layer 424, the insulatinglayer 226, and the transistor that are formed at a high temperature, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. The insulating layers (the insulatinglayers 226 and 424) having high gas barrier properties, which are formed at a high temperature, can be positioned above and below theorganic EL element 450. This can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into theorganic EL element 450. - FIG. 14A2 is a plan view of a light-emitting device, and
FIG. 14C is cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line X6-Y6 in FIG. 14A2. The light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 14A2 is a top-emission light-emitting device using a color filter method. - The light-emitting device illustrated in
FIG. 14C includes theflexible substrate 420, theadhesive layer 422, the insulatinglayer 424, thetransistor 455, the insulatinglayer 463, the insulatinglayer 465, the insulatinglayer 405, the organic EL element 450 (thefirst electrode 401, theEL layer 402, and the second electrode 403), a frame-shapedbonding layer 404 a, a frame-shapedbonding layer 404 b, thebonding layer 407, theovercoat 453, the light-blocking layer 431, thecoloring layer 432, the insulatinglayer 226, theadhesive layer 426, theflexible substrate 428, and theconductive layer 457. Theflexible substrate 428, theadhesive layer 426, the insulatinglayer 226, thebonding layer 407, theovercoat 453, and thesecond electrode 403 transmit visible light. - In the light-emitting
portion 491 of the light-emitting device inFIG. 14C , thetransistor 455 and theorganic EL element 450 are provided over theflexible substrate 420 with theadhesive layer 422 and the insulatinglayer 424 therebetween. Theorganic EL element 450 includes thefirst electrode 401 over the insulatinglayer 465, theEL layer 402 over thefirst electrode 401, and thesecond electrode 403 over theEL layer 402. Thefirst electrode 401 is electrically connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of thetransistor 455. The end portion of thefirst electrode 401 is covered with the insulatinglayer 405. It is preferable that thefirst electrode 401 reflect visible light. Moreover, the light-emitting device includes thecoloring layer 432 that overlaps theorganic EL element 450 with thebonding layer 407 therebetween, and the light-blocking layer 431 that overlaps the insulatinglayer 405 with thebonding layer 407 therebetween. - The
driver circuit portion 493 includes a plurality of transistors.FIG. 14C illustrates one of the transistors in thedriver circuit portion 493. An example in which thedriver circuit portion 493 is more on the inside than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b is described in this embodiment; however, thedriver circuit portion 493 may be more on the outside than one or both of the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b. - The
conductive layer 457 is electrically connected to an external input terminal through which a signal or a potential from the outside is transmitted to thedriver circuit portion 493. Here, an example in which theFPC 495 is provided as the external input terminal is described. Moreover, here, an example in which theconductive layer 457 is formed using the same material and step as those of the electrodes included in thetransistor 455 is described. As illustrated inFIG. 14C , theFPC 495 and theflexible substrate 428 do not necessarily overlap each other. Theconnector 497 is connected to theconductive layer 457. In addition, theconnector 497 is connected to theFPC 495. TheFPC 495 and theconductive layer 457 are electrically connected to each other through theconnector 497. - The
conductive layer 457 is preferably more on the outside than the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 a, in which case entry of impurities such as moisture into theorganic EL element 450 can be prevented even in the case where moisture and the like easily enter a connection portion between theFPC 495 and theconnector 497 and a connection portion between theconnector 497 and theconductive layer 457. - The light-emitting device illustrated in
FIG. 14C is different from that illustrated inFIG. 14B in that the insulatinglayer 465 is covered at a side surface of the light-emitting device. In the case of using an organic insulating material or the like having a poor gas barrier property as a material for the insulatinglayer 465, the insulatinglayer 465 is preferably covered at the side surface of the light-emitting device. The frame-shaped bonding layer having an excellent gas barrier property is preferably positioned at the side surface of the light-emitting device to increase the reliability of the light-emitting device. Note that the insulatinglayer 465 is not necessarily covered at an end portion of the light-emitting device depending on the material or the like for the insulatinglayer 465, as illustrated inFIG. 14B . - The frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b each preferably have a more excellent gas barrier property than the
bonding layer 407 to prevent entry of moisture and oxygen into the light-emitting device through the side surface of the light-emitting device. Thus, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. - For example, in the case where the frame-shaped
bonding layer 404 a has a lower water vapor transmission rate than thebonding layer 407 and the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 b and a drying agent or the like that adsorbs moisture is included in the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 b, entry of moisture can be prevented by the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 a and moisture passing through the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 a is adsorbed by the frame-shapedbonding layer 404 b. This can particularly prevent entry of moisture into thebonding layer 407 and theorganic EL element 450. - In Structure Example 6, light emitted from the
organic EL element 450 is extracted from the light-emitting device through thebonding layer 407. For this reason, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher light-transmitting property than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b. In addition, thebonding layer 407 preferably has a higher refractive index than the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b. Moreover, it is preferable that the volume of thebonding layer 407 be less reduced by curing than that of the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b. - The light-emitting device described as Structure Example 6 can be fabricated with a high yield by using any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention. In particular,
Peeling Method 3 orPeeling Method 4 described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the insulatinglayer 424, each transistor, theorganic EL element 450, and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled over a formation substrate. In addition, over another formation substrate, the insulatinglayer 226, thecoloring layer 432, the light-blocking layer 431, and the like are formed as a layer to be peeled. The two formation substrates are attached to each other, and then the layer to be peeled and the formation substrate are separated and the layer to be peeled and a flexible substrate are attached to each other, so that the light-emitting device described as Structure Example 6 can be fabricated. - In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, an insulating layer and a transistor can be formed over a formation substrate at a high temperature. By using the insulating
layer 424, the insulatinglayer 226, and the transistor that are formed at a high temperature, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. The insulating layers (the insulatinglayer 226 and the insulating layer 424) having high gas barrier properties, which are formed at a high temperature, can be positioned above and below theorganic EL element 450. This can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into theorganic EL element 450. - As described above, in Structure Example 6, the insulating
layer 424, the insulatinglayer 226, and the frame-shaped bonding layers 404 a and 404 b can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into theorganic EL element 450 through a surface (a display surface) of the light-emitting device, a rear surface (a surface facing the display surface) thereof, and a side surface thereof. Thus, the light-emitting device can be highly reliable. - Note that in one embodiment of the present invention, an active matrix method in which an active element (non-linear element) is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.
- In an active matrix method, as an active element, not only a transistor but also various active elements can be used. For example, a metal insulator metal (MIM), a thin film diode (TFD), or the like can also be used. Since these elements can be formed with a smaller number of fabrication steps, fabrication cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Furthermore, since the size of these elements is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved.
- Since an active element is not used in a passive matrix method, the number of fabrication steps is small, so that the fabrication cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Furthermore, since an active element is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved, for example.
- Next, examples of materials that can be used for the light-emitting device are described.
- A flexible material is used for the flexible substrate. For example, an organic resin, a glass material that is thin enough to have flexibility, or the like can be used. Furthermore, a material that transmits visible light is used for the substrate of the light-emitting device from which light is extracted. A metal substrate or the like may be used in the case where the flexible substrate does not necessarily transmit visible light.
- An organic resin, which has a specific gravity smaller than that of glass, is preferably used for the flexible substrate, in which case the light-emitting device can be more lightweight than in the case where glass is used.
- Examples of such a material having flexibility and a light-transmitting property include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin; a polyamide imide resin, and a polyvinyl chloride resin. In particular, a material whose coefficient of thermal expansion is low is preferred, and for example, a polyamide imide resin, a polyimide resin, or PET can be suitably used. A substrate in which a fibrous body is impregnated with a resin (also referred to as prepreg) or a substrate whose coefficient of thermal expansion is reduced by mixing an organic resin with an inorganic filler can also be used.
- In the case where a fibrous body is contained in the material having flexibility and a light-transmitting property, a high-strength fiber of an organic compound or an inorganic compound is used as the fibrous body. A high-strength fiber is specifically a fiber with a high tensile modulus of elasticity or a fiber with a high Young's modulus. Typical examples of a high-strength fiber include a polyvinyl alcohol based fiber, a polyester based fiber, a polyamide based fiber, a polyethylene based fiber, an aramid based fiber, a polyparaphenylene benzobisoxazole fiber, a glass fiber, and a carbon fiber. As the glass fiber, glass fiber using E glass, S glass, D glass, Q glass, or the like can be used. These fibers may be used in a state of a woven fabric or a nonwoven fabric, and a structure in which this fibrous body is impregnated with a resin and the resin is cured may be used as the flexible substrate. When the structure including the fibrous body and the resin is used as the flexible substrate, reliability against bending or breaking due to local pressure can be increased, which is preferable.
- To improve the outcoupling efficiency, the refractive index of the material having flexibility and a light-transmitting property is preferably high. For example, a substrate obtained by dispersing an inorganic filler having a high refractive index into an organic resin can have a higher refractive index than the substrate formed of only the organic resin. In particular, an inorganic filler having a particle diameter as small as 40 nm or less is preferred, because such a filler can maintain optical transparency.
- To obtain flexibility and bendability, the thickness of a metal substrate is preferably greater than or equal to 10 μm and less than or equal to 200 μm, more preferably greater than or equal to 20 μm and less than or equal to 50 μm. Since a metal substrate has high thermal conductivity, heat generated due to light emission of the light-emitting element can be efficiently released.
- There is no particular limitation on a material of the metal substrate, but it is preferable to use, for example, aluminum, copper, nickel, a metal alloy such as an aluminum alloy or stainless steel.
- The flexible substrate may have a stacked-layer structure in which a hard coat layer (such as a silicon nitride layer) by which a surface of a light-emitting device is protected from damage, a layer (such as an aramid resin layer) that can disperse pressure, or the like is stacked over a layer of any of the above-mentioned materials. Furthermore, to suppress a decrease in the lifetime of the functional element (in particular, the organic EL element) due to moisture and the like, an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property described later may be included.
- The flexible substrate may be formed by stacking a plurality of layers. When a glass layer is used, a barrier property against water and oxygen can be improved and thus a reliable light-emitting device can be provided.
- For example, a flexible substrate in which a glass layer, an adhesive layer, and an organic resin layer are stacked from the side closer to an organic EL element can be used. The thickness of the glass layer is greater than or equal to 20 μm and less than or equal to 200 μm, preferably greater than or equal to 25 μm and less than or equal to 100 μm. With such a thickness, the glass layer can have both an excellent barrier property against water and oxygen and a high flexibility. The thickness of the organic resin layer is greater than or equal to 10 μm and less than or equal to 200 μm, preferably greater than or equal to 20 μm and less than or equal to 50 μm. Providing such organic resin layer outside the glass layer, occurrence of a crack or a break in the glass layer can be suppressed and mechanical strength can be improved. With the substrate that includes such a composite material of a glass material and an organic resin, a highly reliable and flexible light-emitting device can be provided.
- As the adhesive layer or the bonding layer, various curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used. Examples of these adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin. In particular, a material with low moisture permeability, such as an epoxy resin, is preferable. Alternatively, a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used. Further alternatively, an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- Furthermore, the resin may include a drying agent. As the drying agent, for example, a substance that adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used. Alternatively, a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption, such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used. The drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can prevent entry of impurities such as moisture into the functional element and can improve the reliability of the light-emitting device.
- In addition, a filler with a high refractive index or a light scattering member is mixed into the resin, in which case the efficiency of light extraction from the light-emitting element can be improved. For example, titanium oxide, barium oxide, zeolite, zirconium, or the like can be used.
- An insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property is preferably used as the insulating
layer 424 and the insulatinglayer 226. In addition, an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property may be formed between thebonding layer 407 and thesecond electrode 403. - As an insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property, a film containing nitrogen and silicon, such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film, a film containing nitrogen and aluminum, such as an aluminum nitride film, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used.
- The gas transmission rate, the oxygen transmission rate, or the water vapor transmission rate of the insulating layer having an excellent gas barrier property is, for example, less than or equal to 1 [g/m2·day], preferably less than or equal to 1×10−6 [g/m2·day], further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−7 [g/m2·day], still further preferably less than or equal to 1×10−8 [g/m2·day]. The above transmission rates are preferably satisfied under hot and humid environment (e.g., temperature: 65° C., humidity: 95%).
- Note that the above inorganic insulating layers can also be used as other insulating layers.
- As the insulating
layer 463, for example, an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, or an aluminum oxide film can be used. For example, as the insulatinglayer 465 and the insulatinglayer 467, an organic material such as polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, or a benzocyclobutene-based resin can be used. Alternatively, a low-dielectric constant material (a low-k material) or the like can be used. Furthermore, the insulatinglayer 465 and the insulatinglayer 467 may be formed by stacking a plurality of insulating layers. - The insulating
layer 405 is formed using an organic insulating material or an inorganic insulating material. As the resin, for example, a polyimide resin, a polyamide resin, an acrylic resin, a siloxane resin, an epoxy resin, or a phenol resin can be used. It is particularly preferable that the insulatinglayer 405 be formed to have an inclined side wall with continuous curvature, using a photosensitive resin material. - There is no particular limitation on the method for forming the insulating
layer 405; a photolithography method, a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a droplet discharging method (e.g., an ink-jet method), a printing method (e.g., a screen printing method or an off-set printing method), or the like may be used. - The
spacer 496 can be formed using an inorganic insulating material, an organic insulating material, a metal material, or the like. As the inorganic insulating material and the organic insulating material, for example, a variety of materials that can be used for the insulating layer can be used. As the metal material, titanium, aluminum, or the like can be used. When thespacer 496 containing a conductive material and thesecond electrode 403 are electrically connected to each other, a potential drop due to the resistance of thesecond electrode 403 can be suppressed. Thespacer 496 may have either a tapered shape or an inverse tapered shape. - There is no particular limitation on the structure of the transistor used in the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention. For example, a forward staggered transistor or an inverted staggered transistor may be used. A top-gate transistor or a bottom-gate transistor may be used. In addition, there is no particular limitation on a material used for the transistor. For example, a transistor in which silicon, germanium, or an oxide semiconductor is used in a channel formation region can be used. There is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of a semiconductor, and any of an amorphous semiconductor or a semiconductor having crystallinity (a microcrystalline semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, and a semiconductor partly including crystal regions) may be used. A semiconductor having crystallinity is preferably used, in which case deterioration of transistor characteristics can be suppressed. As silicon, amorphous silicon, single crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, or the like can be used. As an oxide semiconductor, an In—Ga—Zn—O-based metal oxide or the like can be used.
- For stable characteristics of the transistor, a base film is preferably provided. The base film can be formed with an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure. The base film can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the base film is not necessarily provided. In each of the above structural examples, the insulating
layer 424 can serve as a base film of the transistor. - The structure of the organic EL element used for the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention is not particularly limited. The organic EL element may have a top emission structure, a bottom emission structure, or a dual emission structure.
- When a voltage higher than the threshold voltage of the organic EL element is applied between a pair of electrodes, holes are injected to the
EL layer 402 from the anode side and electrons are injected to theEL layer 402 from the cathode side. The injected electrons and holes are recombined in theEL layer 402 and a light-emitting substance contained in theEL layer 402 emits light. - A conductive film that transmits visible light is used as the electrode through which light is extracted in the organic EL element. A conductive film that reflects visible light is preferably used as the electrode through which light is not extracted.
- The conductive film that transmits visible light can be formed using, for example, indium oxide, an indium tin oxide (ITO), an indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium is added. Alternatively, a film of a metal material such as gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, or titanium; an alloy containing any of these metal materials; or a nitride of any of these metal materials (e.g., titanium nitride) can be formed thin so as to have a light-transmitting property. Further alternatively, a stack of any of the above materials can be used as the conductive layer. For example, a stacked film of ITO and an alloy of silver and magnesium is preferably used, in which case conductivity can be increased. Further alternatively, graphene or the like may be used.
- For the conductive film that reflects visible light, for example, a metal material, such as aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, or palladium or an alloy including any of these metal materials can be used. Lanthanum, neodymium, germanium, or the like may be added to the metal material or the alloy. Furthermore, an alloy containing aluminum (an aluminum alloy) such as an alloy of aluminum and titanium, an alloy of aluminum and nickel, or an alloy of aluminum and neodymium; or an alloy containing silver such as an alloy of silver and copper, an alloy of silver, copper, and palladium, or an alloy of silver and magnesium can be used for the conductive film. An alloy of silver and copper is preferable because of its high heat resistance. Moreover, a metal film or a metal oxide film is stacked on an aluminum alloy film, whereby oxidation of the aluminum alloy film can be suppressed. Examples of a material for the metal film or the metal oxide film are titanium and titanium oxide. Alternatively, the conductive film having a property of transmitting visible light and a film containing any of the above metal materials may be stacked. For example, a stacked film of silver and ITO or a stacked film of an alloy of silver and magnesium and ITO can be used.
- The electrodes may be formed separately by an evaporation method or a sputtering method. Alternatively, a discharging method such as an ink-jet method, a printing method such as a screen printing method, or a plating method may be used.
- The
EL layer 402 includes at least a light-emitting layer. In addition to the light-emitting layer, theEL layer 402 may further include one or more layers containing any of a substance with a high hole-injection property, a substance with a high hole-transport property, a hole-blocking material, a substance with a high electron-transport property, a substance with a high electron-injection property, a substance with a bipolar property (a substance with a high electron- and hole-transport property), and the like. - For the
EL layer 402, either a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound can be used, and an inorganic compound may also be used. The above-described layers included in theEL layer 402 can be formed separately by any of the following methods: an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, and the like. - Although the organic EL element is described here as an example of a light-emitting element, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto, and a display element, a light-emitting element, a semiconductor element, or the like may be used.
- For example, in this specification and the like, a display element, a display device that is a device including a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device that is a device including a light-emitting element can employ a variety of modes or can include a variety of elements. Examples of a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, or a light-emitting device include an EL element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an LED (e.g., a white LED, a red LED, a green LED, or a blue LED), a transistor (a transistor that emits light depending on current), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a micro electro mechanical system (MEMS), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a digital micro shutter (DMS), an interferometric modulator display (IMOD) element, an electrowetting element, a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube, which are display media whose contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittance, or the like is changed by electromagnetic action. Note that examples of display devices having EL elements include an EL display. Examples of a display device including an electron emitter are a field emission display (FED) and a surface-conduction electron-emitter display (SED)-type flat panel display. Examples of a display device including a liquid crystal element include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display). An example of a display device including electronic ink or electrophoretic elements is electronic paper.
- The coloring layer is a colored layer that transmits light in a specific wavelength range. For example, a red (R) color filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a green (G) color filter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a blue (B) color filter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, or the like can be used. Each coloring layer is formed in a desired position with any of various materials by a printing method, an inkjet method, an etching method using a photolithography method, or the like.
- The light-blocking layer is provided between the adjacent coloring layers. The light-blocking layer blocks light emitted from an adjacent organic EL element to prevent color mixture between adjacent organic EL elements. Here, the coloring layer is provided such that its end portion overlaps the light-blocking layer, whereby light leakage can be suppressed. As the light-blocking layer, a material that can block light from the organic EL element can be used; for example, a black matrix may be formed using a resin material containing a metal material, pigment, or dye. Note that it is preferable to provide the light-blocking layer in a region other than the light-emitting portion, such as a driver circuit portion, in which case undesired leakage of guided light or the like can be suppressed.
- Furthermore, an overcoat covering the coloring layer and the light-blocking layer may be provided. With the overcoat, impurities and the like contained in the coloring layer can be prevented from being diffused into an organic EL element. The overcoat is formed with a material that transmits light emitted from the organic EL element; for example, an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon oxide film, an organic insulating film such as an acrylic film or a polyimide film can be used, and a stacked structure of an organic insulating film and an inorganic insulating film may be used.
- In the case where upper surfaces of the
coloring layer 432 and the light-blocking layer 431 are coated with a material of thebonding layer 407, a material that has high wettability with respect to the material of thebonding layer 407 is preferably used as the material of the overcoat. For example, an oxide conductive film such as an ITO film or a metal film such as an Ag film that is thin enough to transmit light is preferably used as the overcoat 453 (seeFIGS. 14B and 14C ). - For example, the conductive layer functioning as an electrode or a wiring of the transistor, an auxiliary electrode or an auxiliary wiring of the organic EL element, or the like can be found to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using any of metal materials such as molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, aluminum, copper, neodymium, and scandium, and an alloy material containing any of these elements. Alternatively, the conductive layer may be formed using a conductive metal oxide. As the conductive metal oxide, indium oxide (e.g., In2O3), tin oxide (e.g., SnO2), zinc oxide (ZnO), ITO, indium zinc oxide (e.g., In2O3—ZnO), or any of these metal oxide materials in which silicon oxide is contained can be used.
- The thickness of the auxiliary wiring can be greater than or equal to 0.1 μm and less than or equal to 3 μm, preferably greater than or equal to 0.1 μm and less than or equal to 0.5 μm.
- When a paste (e.g., silver paste) is used as the material of the auxiliary wiring, a metal forming the auxiliary wiring aggregates in the form of particles. As a result, the surface of the auxiliary wiring becomes rough and has many gaps, so that it is difficult for the EL layer to cover the auxiliary electrode completely. Thus, the upper electrode and the auxiliary wiring are electrically connected to each other easily, which is preferable.
- [Light Outcoupling Structure]
- For the light outcoupling structure, a hemispherical lens, a micro lens array, a film provided with an uneven surface structure, a light diffusing film, or the like can be used. For example, a light outcoupling structure can be formed by attaching the lens or film to the substrate with an adhesive or the like that has substantially the same refractive index as the substrate or the lens or film.
- For the
connector 497, it is possible to use a paste-like or sheet-like material that is obtained by mixture of metal particles and a thermosetting resin and for which anisotropic electric conductivity is provided by thermocompression bonding. As the metal particles, particles in which two or more kinds of metals are layered, for example, nickel particles coated with gold are preferably used. - This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- In this embodiment, electronic appliances and lighting devices that can be fabricated by employing any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention are described with reference to
FIGS. 9D to 9I andFIGS. 15A to 15G . - A light-emitting device, a display device, a semiconductor device, or the like that can be used for an electronic appliance or a lighting device can be fabricated with a high yield by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention. Moreover, a flexible electronic appliance or lighting device having high productivity can be fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention.
- Examples of an electronic appliance include a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer or the like, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a digital photo frame, a mobile phone (also referred to as a mobile phone device), a portable game machine, a portable information terminal, an audio reproducing device, and a large game machine such as a pinball machine.
- The device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention has flexibility and therefore can be incorporated along a curved inside/outside wall surface of a house or a building or a curved interior/exterior surface of a car.
-
FIG. 15A illustrates an example of a mobile phone. Themobile phone 7400 is provided with adisplay portion 7402 incorporated in ahousing 7401,operation buttons 7403, anexternal connection port 7404, aspeaker 7405, amicrophone 7406, and the like. Note that thecellular phone 7400 is fabricated using the display device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention for thedisplay portion 7402. One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable mobile phone having a curved display portion to be provided with a high yield. - When the
display portion 7402 of themobile phone 7400 illustrated inFIG. 15A is touched with a finger or the like, data can be input into themobile phone 7400. In addition, operations such as making a call and inputting a letter can be performed by touch on thedisplay portion 7402 with a finger or the like. - With the
operation buttons 7403, the power can be turned on or off. In addition, types of images displayed on thedisplay portion 7402 can be switched; switching images from a mail creation screen to a main menu screen. -
FIG. 15B illustrates an example of a wrist-watch-type portable information terminal. Aportable information terminal 7100 includes ahousing 7101, adisplay portion 7102, aband 7103, abuckle 7104, anoperation button 7105, an input/output terminal 7106, and the like. - The
portable information terminal 7100 is capable of executing a variety of applications such as mobile phone calls, e-mailing, reading and editing texts, music reproduction, Internet communication, and a computer game. - The display surface of the
display portion 7102 is bent, and images can be displayed on the bent display surface. Furthermore, thedisplay portion 7102 includes a touch sensor, and operation can be performed by touching the screen with a finger, a stylus, or the like. For example, by touching anicon 7107 displayed on thedisplay portion 7102, an application can be started. - With the
operation button 7105, a variety of functions such as ON/OFF of the power, ON/OFF of wireless communication, setting and cancellation of manner mode, and setting and cancellation of power saving mode can be performed. For example, the functions of theoperation button 7105 can be set freely by setting the operation system incorporated in theportable information terminal 7100. - The
portable information terminal 7100 can employ near field communication that is a communication method based on an existing communication standard. In that case, for example, mutual communication between theportable information terminal 7100 and a headset capable of wireless communication can be performed, and thus hands-free calling is possible. - Moreover, the
portable information terminal 7100 includes the input/output terminal 7106, and data can be directly transmitted to and received from another information terminal via a connector. Charging through the input/output terminal 7106 is possible. Note that the charging operation may be performed by wireless power feeding without using the input/output terminal 7106. - The
display portion 7102 of theportable information terminal 7100 includes a light-emitting panel fabricated by using one embodiment of the present invention. One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable portable information terminal having a curved display portion to be provided with a high yield. -
FIGS. 15C to 15E illustrate examples of a lighting device.Lighting devices stage 7201 provided with anoperation switch 7203 and a light-emitting portion supported by thestage 7201. - The
lighting device 7200 illustrated inFIG. 15C includes a light-emittingportion 7202 having a wave-shaped light-emitting surface, and thus has good design. - A light-emitting
portion 7212 included in thelighting device 7210 illustrated inFIG. 15D has two convex-curved light-emitting portions symmetrically placed. Thus, light radiates from thelighting device 7210 in all directions. - The
lighting device 7220 illustrated inFIG. 15E includes a concave-curved light-emittingportion 7222. This is suitable for illuminating a specific range because light emitted from the light-emittingportion 7222 is collected to the front of thelighting device 7220. - The light-emitting portion included in each of the
lighting devices - Note that although the lighting device in which the light-emitting portion is supported by the stage is described as an example here, a housing provided with a light-emitting portion can be fixed on a ceiling or suspended from a ceiling. Since the light-emitting surface can be curved, the light-emitting surface is curved to have a depressed shape, whereby a particular region can be brightly illuminated, or the light-emitting surface is curved to have a projecting shape, whereby a whole room can be brightly illuminated.
- Here, each light-emitting portion includes a light-emitting device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention. One embodiment of the present invention enables a highly reliable lighting device having a curved light-emitting portion to be provided with a high yield.
-
FIG. 15F illustrates an example of a portable display device. Adisplay device 7300 includes ahousing 7301, adisplay portion 7302,operation buttons 7303, adisplay portion pull 7304, and acontrol portion 7305. - The
display device 7300 includes a rolledflexible display portion 7302 in thecylindrical housing 7301. - The
display device 7300 can receive a video signal with thecontrol portion 7305 and can display the received video on thedisplay portion 7302. In addition, a battery is included in thecontrol portion 7305. Moreover, a terminal portion for connecting a connector may be included in thecontrol portion 7305 so that a video signal or power can be directly supplied from the outside with a wiring. - By pressing the
operation buttons 7303, ON/OFF of the power, switching of displayed videos, and the like can be performed. -
FIG. 15G illustrates adisplay device 7300 in a state where thedisplay portion 7302 is pulled out with thedisplay portion pull 7304. Videos can be displayed on thedisplay portion 7302 in this state. Furthermore, theoperation buttons 7303 on the surface of thehousing 7301 allow one-handed operation. Theoperation buttons 7303 are provided not in the center of thehousing 7301 but on one side of thehousing 7301 as illustrated inFIG. 15F , which makes one-handed operation easy. - Note that a reinforcement frame may be provided for a side portion of the
display portion 7302 so that thedisplay portion 7302 has a flat display surface when pulled out. - Note that in addition to this structure, a speaker may be provided for the housing so that sound is output with an audio signal received together with a video signal.
- The
display portion 7302 includes a display device fabricated by employing the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention. One embodiment of the present invention enables a lightweight and highly reliable display device to be provided with a high yield. -
FIGS. 9D to 9F illustrate a foldableportable information terminal 310.FIG. 9D illustrates theportable information terminal 310 that is opened.FIG. 9E illustrates theportable information terminal 310 that is being opened or being folded.FIG. 9F illustrates theportable information terminal 310 that is folded. Theportable information terminal 310 is highly portable when folded. When theportable information terminal 310 is opened, a seamless large display region is highly browsable. - A
display panel 311 is supported by threehousings 315 joined together by hinges 313. By folding theportable information terminal 310 at a connection portion between twohousings 315 with thehinges 313, theportable information terminal 310 can be reversibly changed in shape from an opened state to a folded state. A display device fabricated by any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention can be used for thedisplay panel 311. For example, a display device that can be bent with a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm can be used. -
FIG. 9G is a perspective view illustrating an external shape of theportable information terminal 330.FIG. 9H is a top view of theportable information terminal 330.FIG. 9I is a perspective view illustrating an external shape of aportable information terminal 340. - The
portable information terminals portable information terminals - The
portable information terminals operation buttons 339 can be displayed on one surface (FIGS. 9G and 9I ). In addition,information 337 indicated by dashed rectangles can be displayed on another surface (FIGS. 9H and 9I ). Examples of theinformation 337 include notification from a social networking service (SNS), display indicating reception of an e-mail or an incoming call, the title of an e-mail or the like, the sender of an e-mail or the like, the date, the time, remaining battery, and the reception strength of an antenna. Alternatively, theoperation buttons 339, an icon, or the like may be displayed in place of theinformation 337. AlthoughFIGS. 9G and 9H illustrate an example in which theinformation 337 is displayed at the top, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. The information may be displayed, for example, on the side as illustrated inFIG. 9I . - For example, a user of the
portable information terminal 330 can see the display (here, the information 337) with theportable information terminal 330 put in a breast pocket of his/her clothes. - Specifically, a caller's phone number, name, or the like of an incoming call is displayed in a position that can be seen from above the
portable information terminal 330. Thus, the user can see the display without taking out theportable information terminal 330 from the pocket and decide whether to answer the call. - A display device fabricated by any of the peeling methods of embodiments of the present invention can be used for a
display portion 333 mounted in each of ahousing 335 of theportable information terminal 330 and ahousing 336 of theportable information terminal 340. One embodiment of the present invention makes it possible to provide a highly reliable display device having a curved display portion with a high yield. - This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- In this embodiment, a peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to
FIGS. 16A to 16C . - In the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, the
peeling layer 103 is formed to a thickness of greater than or equal to 10 nm over theformation substrate 101, and the layer to be peeled 105 is formed over the peeling layer (FIG. 16A ). - In this embodiment, a 30-nm-thick tungsten film is formed and dinitrogen monoxide (N2O) plasma treatment is performed on a surface of the tungsten film. Thus, a
tungsten film 373 over theformation substrate 101 and atungsten oxide film 374 over thetungsten film 373 can be formed as thepeeling layer 103. The thickness of thetungsten oxide film 374 can be, for example, approximately 10 nm. - The structure and formation method of the peeling layer are not limited to those described above. For example, any of the materials given in
Embodiment 1 can be used. A layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed as follows: a layer containing tungsten is formed and an insulating layer formed of an oxide is formed thereover, so that the layer containing an oxide of tungsten is formed at the interface between the layer containing tungsten and the insulating layer. Alternatively, the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the layer containing tungsten. Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas. - By forming the
tungsten oxide film 374 between thetungsten film 373 and the layer to be peeled 105, the adhesion between the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled can be controlled. This can improve the yield of the peeling process. - Next, in the same manner as the peeling method described in
Embodiment 1, the layer to be peeled 105 and a substrate are attached to each other with a bonding layer, and the bonding layer is cured. After that, a peeling trigger is formed. Then, the layer to be peeled 105 and theformation substrate 101 are separated from the formed peeling trigger. - When peeling occurs at the interface between the
tungsten film 373 and thetungsten oxide film 374 or in the vicinity of the interface, part of the peeling layer 103 (here, part of the tungsten oxide film 374) might remain on the layer to be peeled 105 side.FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional TEM image showing thetungsten oxide film 374 that remains on the layer to be peeled 105 after the peeling from theformation substrate 101. Note that alayer 376 inFIG. 16B is a carbon film provided for cross-sectional TEM observation. - The
tungsten oxide film 374 that remains in a device such as a light-emitting device fabricated by the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention causes a defect such as a shift of transistor characteristics in some cases. - For this reason, the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention includes a step of removing the
tungsten oxide film 374 remaining on the layer to be peeled 105 after peeling occurs at the interface between thetungsten film 373 and thetungsten oxide film 374 or in the vicinity of the interface. Thetungsten oxide film 374 may be removed completely or partly. The tungsten oxide film may remain as long as a device is not damaged. - For example, water or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used to remove the tungsten oxide film. Alternatively, for example, an ethanol aqueous solution or an H2O2 aqueous solution can be used. Since the rate at which the tungsten oxide film can be removed varies depending on the temperature of water or a solution, the water or the solution may be selected as appropriate. For example, water at a temperature of approximately 60° C. can remove the tungsten oxide film more easily than water at room temperature.
- For example, the tungsten film may be wiped off with a non-woven wiping cloth or the like that has absorbed water or a solution, or the tungsten oxide film may be removed by soaking a sample in water or a solution.
- The tungsten oxide film may alternatively be removed physically. For example, the tungsten oxide film may be removed by polishing with sandpaper or the like.
- In this embodiment, the tungsten oxide film is wiped off with a non-woven wiping cloth that has absorbed an ethanol aqueous solution, and then the tungsten oxide film was further wiped off with a non-woven wiping cloth that has adsorbed an H2O2 aqueous solution.
FIG. 16C is a cross-sectional TEM image after removing the tungsten oxide film. Note that thelayer 376 inFIG. 16C is the carbon film provided for cross-sectional TEM observation. - As described above, in the peeling method of one embodiment of the present invention, a stack of the tungsten film and the tungsten oxide film is used as the peeling layer, and the tungsten oxide film that remains on the layer to be peeled is removed after separation of the formation substrate and the layer to be peeled. This can improve the yield of the peeling process. In addition, a defect such as a shift of transistor characteristics can be suppressed.
- This embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- Described in this embodiment are measurement results of the force required for peeling a layer to be peeled from a formation substrate in samples in each of which a layer to be peeled is formed over the formation substrate with the peeling layer therebetween.
-
FIG. 17A illustrates a structure of each sample in this example. The sample includes theformation substrate 101, abase film 301 over theformation substrate 101, thepeeling layer 103 over thebase film 301, the layer to be peeled 105 over thepeeling layer 103, thebonding layer 107 over the layer to be peeled 105, and thesubstrate 109 over thebonding layer 107. - Table 1 shows differences in the fabrication conditions between the samples.
-
TABLE 1 Sample 1Sample 2Sample 3Sample 4Sample 5Sample 6Sample 7Sample 8Heat treatment 450° C. 1 hour Layer to be Structure 1Structure 2Structure 3Structure 1Structure 1Structure 1Structure 1Structure 3peeled N2O plasma No No No Yes No No No No treatment Peeling layer 30 nm 30 nm 30 nm 30 nm 15 nm 10 nm 5 nm 5 nm - First, an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the
base film 301 over a glass substrate serving as theformation substrate 101. The silicon oxynitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N2O gas were 10 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the supplied power was 30 W, the pressure was 22 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. - Next, a tungsten film serving as the
peeling layer 103 was formed over thebase film 301. The thickness of the tungsten film differs among the samples. The tungsten films serving as the peeling layers in the samples were formed to the respective thicknesses shown in Table 1. The tungsten film was formed by a sputtering method under the following conditions: the flow rate of an Ar gas was 100 sccm, the power supply was 60 kW, the pressure was 2 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 100° C. - Next, dinitrogen monoxide (N2O) plasma treatment was performed. The N2O plasma treatment was performed for 240 seconds under the following conditions: the flow rate of an N2O gas was 100 sccm, the power supply was 500 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. Whether the N2O plasma treatment was performed depended on the sample (see Table 1).
- Next, the layer to be peeled 105 was formed over the
peeling layer 103. The layer to be peeled 105 had a stacked-layer structure of a firstsilicon oxynitride film 303 and an insulatinglayer 305. The structure of the layer to be peeled 105 differs from sample to sample as shown in Table 1. - First, the first
silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed to a thickness of approximately 600 nm over thepeeling layer 103. The firstsilicon oxynitride film 303 was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N2O gas were 75 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. - Then, the first
silicon oxynitride film 303 was processed into an island shape by wet etching and thepeeling layer 103 was processed into an island shape by dry etching. - After that, the insulating
layer 305 was formed over the firstsilicon oxynitride film 303. The insulatinglayer 305 inStructure 1 of the layer to be peeled had a four-layer structure of a first silicon nitride film, a second silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, and a third silicon oxynitride film. - First, the first silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first
silicon oxynitride film 303. The first silicon nitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H2 gas, and an NH3 gas were 30 sccm, 800 sccm, and 300 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 600 W, the pressure was 60 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. - Next, the second silicon oxynitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first silicon nitride film. The second silicon oxynitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N2O gas were 50 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- Then, the silicon nitride oxide film was formed to a thickness of approximately 140 nm over the second silicon oxynitride film. The silicon nitride oxide film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H2 gas, an N2 gas, an NH3 gas, and an N2O gas were 110 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, and 70 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 320 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- After that, the third silicon oxynitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 100 nm over the silicon nitride oxide film. The third silicon oxynitride film was formed under the same conditions as the
base film 301. - The first
silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed in the same manner asStructure 1. The insulatinglayer 305 had a single layer structure of the second silicon nitride film. - Specifically, the second silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first
silicon oxynitride film 303. The second silicon nitride film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an N2 gas, and an NH3 gas were 38 sccm, 1000 sccm, and 250 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 150 W, the pressure was 50 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. - The first
silicon oxynitride film 303 was formed in the same manner asStructure 1. The insulatinglayer 305 had a single layer structure of the first silicon nitride film. - Specifically, the first silicon nitride film was formed to a thickness of approximately 200 nm over the first
silicon oxynitride film 303. The first silicon nitride film was formed under the same conditions as those ofStructure 1. - After the layer to be peeled having any one of
Structures 1 to 3 described above was formed, heat treatment was performed at 450° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere for 1 hour. - Then, the layer to be peeled 105 and a film with an adhesive were attached to each other to form the
bonding layer 107 and thesubstrate 109 over the layer to be peeled 105. - The force required for peeling the layer to be peeled from the formation substrate in each sample fabricated under the above-described conditions was measured. A jig illustrated in
FIG. 17B was used for the measurement. The jig illustrated inFIG. 17B includes a plurality ofguide rollers 154 and a plurality ofsupport rollers 153. Atape 151 is attached onto alayer 150 including a layer to be peeled that is formed over theformation substrate 101 and an end portion of thetape 151 is partly peeled in advance. Then, theformation substrate 101 is fixed to the jig so that thetape 151 is held by thesupport rollers 153, and thetape 151 and thelayer 150 including the layer to be peeled are positioned perpendicular to theformation substrate 101. The force required for peeling can be measured as follows: when thetape 151 is pulled at a rate of 20 mm/min in a direction perpendicular to theformation substrate 101 to peel thelayer 150 including the layer to be peeled from theformation substrate 101, the pulling force in the perpendicular direction is measured. During the peeling, theformation substrate 101 moves in the plane direction along theguide rollers 154 with thepeeling layer 103 exposed. Thesupport rollers 153 and theguide rollers 154 are rotatable so that theformation substrate 101 and thelayer 150 including the layer to be peeled are not affected by friction during the move. - For the peeling test, a compact table-top universal tester (EZ-TEST EZ-S-50N) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation was used. For the peeling test, an adhesive tape/adhesive sheet testing method based on the standard number JIS Z0237 of Japanese Industrial Standards (RS) was referred to. Each sample had a size of 126 mm×25 mm.
-
FIG. 18 shows the forces required for peeling inSamples 1 to 4. Table 2 shows the stress on each layer included in the layer to be peeled 105 and the stress on the layer to be peeled 105. -
TABLE 2 Stress Thickness Conditions (MPa) First silicon 600 nm SiH4 = 75 sccm, N2O = 1200 sccm, −55.1 oxynitride film 120 W, 70 Pa, 330° C. First silicon 200 nm SiH4 = 30 sccm, H2 = 800 sccm, NH3 = 300 sccm, −612.1 nitride film 600 W, 60 Pa, 330° C. Second silicon 200 nm SiH4 = 50 sccm, N2O = 1200 sccm, −187.2 oxynitride film 120 W, 70 Pa, 330° C. Silicon nitride 140 nm SiH4 = 110 sccm, H2 = 800 sccm, 445.3 oxide film N2 = 800 sccm, NH3 = 800 sccm, N2O = 70 sccm, 320 W, 100 Pa, 330° C. Third silicon 100 nm SiH4 = 10 sccm, N2O = 1200 sccm, −331.9 oxynitride film 30 W, 22 Pa, 330° C. Second silicon 200 nm SiH4 = 38 sccm, N2 = 1000 sccm, NH3 = 250 sccm, 583.5 nitride film 150 W, 50 Pa, 330° C. Stress Stacked-layer structure (MPa) Structure 1 of first silicon oxynitride film 303\first silicon nitride film\ −82.3 layer to be peeled second silicon oxynitride film\silicon nitride oxide film\ third silicon oxynitride film Structure 2 of first silicon oxynitride film 303\second silicon nitride film 112.5 layer to be peeled Structure 3 of first silicon oxynitride film 303\first silicon nitride film −162.2 layer to be peeled value in the case of a thickness of 200 nm - Note that in the case where the force required for peeling is greater than or equal to 0.14 N in this example, the layer to be peeled 105 might remain on the
formation substrate 101 side after the peeling test. In contrast, in the case where the force is less than 0.14 N, favorable peeling can be performed without the layer to be peeled 105 remaining on theformation substrate 101 side. Thus, in the following peeling tests, conditions where the force required for peeling is less than 0.14 N are regarded as conditions where peeling is possible. - As shown in Table 2, the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 in the case where the layer to be peeled 105 had
Structure 2 is expressed as a positive value (i.e., tensile stress). AlthoughSample 2 in which the layer to be peeled hadStructure 2 required a small amount of force for peeling as shown inFIG. 18 , a defect such as a crack occurred at the time of peeling. - As shown in Table 2, the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 in the case where the layer to be peeled 105 had
Structure FIG. 18 , the force required for peeling inSample 3 was greater than or equal to 0.14 N, which indicates a low yield of a peeling process. Although the force required for peeling inSample 1 is less than 0.14 N, the force is greater than that inSample 2. The comparison betweenSample 1 andSample 4 demonstrates that the N2O plasma treatment can reduce the force required for peeling. - The results shown in
FIG. 18 reveal that the force required for peeling is high (e.g., the compressive stress on the layer to be peeled is high) depending on the structure of the layer to be peeled 105 when the thickness of thepeeling layer 103 is 30 nm. The results shown inFIG. 18 also reveal that addition of a step (e.g., N2O plasma treatment) enables a reduction in the force required for peeling. - The results shown in
FIG. 18 and Table 2 reveal that the force required for peeling in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a positive value (i.e., tensile stress) is lower than that in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a negative value (i.e., compressive stress). The results shown inFIG. 18 and Table 2 also reveal that a crack is less likely to occur at the time of peeling in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a negative value (i.e., compressive stress) than in the case where the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 has a positive value (i.e., tensile stress). -
FIG. 19 shows the force required for peeling inSamples Samples 5 to 8. - The results shown in
FIG. 19 revealed that in the case where the insulatinglayer 305 hadStructure 1, the force required for peeling was reduced as the thickness of the tungsten film was decreased. In addition, when the tungsten film was 5 nm thick, the force required for peeling in the case where the insulatinglayer 305 hadStructure 1 was as low as that in the case where the insulatinglayer 305 hadStructure 3. As the result ofSample 8 shows, the layer to be peeled with high compressive stress, which was difficult to peel when the tungsten film was 30 nm thick, was able to be peeled with a smaller amount of force when the tungsten film was 5 nm thick. - The above results revealed that the use of the 5-nm-thick tungsten film as the
peeling layer 103 allows the layer to be peeled 105 to be peeled from theformation substrate 101 with a small amount of force regardless of whether the stress on the layer to be peeled 105 had a positive value or a negative value. - Note that the stress on the tungsten film with each thickness was measured: the tungsten films had stresses of 1145.8 MPa, 773.2 MPa, and 607.6 MPa when the thicknesses were 30 nm, 50 nm, and 100 nm, respectively. This revealed that the tensile stress was able to be increased as the thickness of the tungsten film was decreased.
- In this example, the water vapor transmission rate of an insulating layer that can be used in one embodiment of the present invention was measured.
- First, an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a base film over a glass substrate by a plasma CVD method. Then, an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed as a peeling layer by a sputtering method.
- Next, N2O plasma treatment was performed on a surface of the tungsten film, and five layers were stacked as an insulating layer (an insulating
layer 392 inFIG. 20A ). First, an approximately 600-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a first insulating layer. The silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N2O gas were 75 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C. - Then, an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon nitride film was formed as a second insulating layer. The silicon nitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H2 gas, and an NH3 gas were 30 sccm, 800 sccm, and 300 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 600 W, the pressure was 60 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- Next, an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a third insulating layer. The silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an N2O gas were 50 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 120 W, the pressure was 70 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- Then, an approximately 140-nm-thick silicon nitride oxide film was formed as a fourth insulating layer. The silicon nitride oxide film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas, an H2 gas, an N2 gas, an NH3 gas, and an N2O gas were 110 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, 800 sccm, and 70 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 320 W, the pressure was 100 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- Then, an approximately 100-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a fifth insulating layer. The silicon oxynitride film was formed under the following conditions: the flow rates of a silane gas and an H2O gas were 10 sccm and 1200 sccm, respectively, the power supply was 30 W, the pressure was 22 Pa, and the substrate temperature was 330° C.
- After that, heat treatment was performed at 450° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere for 1 hour.
- Next, a two-component epoxy adhesive (product name: R2007/H-1010, produced by ALTECO INC.) was applied as a sealing
resin 390, and it was cured while being left still at room temperature for 24 hours. Then, a UV peeling tape was attached to the sealingresin 390. After that, peeling was performed at the interface between the peeling layer and the first insulating layer to remove the glass substrate provided with the base film and the peeling layer. - Next, the above-described two-component epoxy adhesive was applied as an
adhesive layer 394 to an exposed surface of the first insulating layer, and a 20-μm-thick film was attached as asubstrate 396 to theadhesive layer 394 with a laminator. Then, theadhesive layer 394 was cured, and the above UV peeling film was irradiated with UV light to peel the film. - The water vapor transmission rate of the fabricated sample was measured. A highly sensitive water vapor transmission rate measuring instrument (product name. HiBarSens, produced by Fraunhofer IWS) was used, and a diffusion control method was used as a measuring mode. The temperature and the relative humidity on the water vapor supply side (corresponding to the side where a water vapor filled
chamber 173 was provided) were set at 38.0° C. and 90% RH, respectively. The measurement was conducted twice. - The measuring instrument in this example can be used in three modes, a static control method, a dynamic control method, and a diffusion control method, and is capable of highly accurate and highly sensitive measurement of a water vapor transmission rate. The measurement limit of many measuring instruments is 10−5 g/m2·day to 10−6 g/m2·day; however, the measuring instrument used in this example is capable of highly accurate measurement up to 10−7 g/m2·day.
- The measuring instrument used in this example includes one chamber. The chamber is divided into two parts by a
sample 171 set as shown inFIG. 20C . One part of the chamber serves as the water vapor filledchamber 173 for supplying water vapor and the other part serves as a watervapor transmission chamber 175 for measuring the water vapor concentration. Water vapor with a constant temperature and constant humidity is supplied to the water vapor filledchamber 173, and the amount of water vapor moving to the watervapor transmission chamber 175 through thesample 171 is measured. Dry nitrogen can be supplied to the watervapor transmission chamber 175. The supply of dry nitrogen can be controlled by opening and closing a valve depending on the measurement method. The watervapor transmission chamber 175 is also provided with a laser light source and a detector and has a 2-m-long light path therein. The concentration of water vapor in the watervapor transmission chamber 175 can be measured by measuring the decay rate of the intensity of laser light. - A change in the amount of water vapor in the entire system Jsys is represented by the following equation: JSYS=WVTR+jcell+Jsample+Jtubes, where WVTR represents a water vapor, transmission rate; jcell, a change due to desorption of water molecules on an inner wall of the chamber; jsample, a change due to desorption of water molecules on a surface of the sample; and jtubes, a change due to desorption of water molecules on an inner wall of a tube.
- In the equilibrium state, the equation jcell=jsample=jtubes=0 is satisfied; thus, the water vapor transmission rate can be estimated by measuring a change in the amount of water vapor in the entire system.
- There are three modes for the measurement method. The first mode is a dynamic measurement method. In the dynamic measurement method, dry nitrogen is constantly supplied at a fixed flow rate into the measurement chamber, and WVTR is estimated from the concentration of water vapor in the equilibrium state on the basis of the fact that WVTR has a fixed value. The dynamic measurement method is suitable for accurately measuring WVTR up to 10−4 level.
- The second mode is a static measurement method. In the static measurement method, supply of dry nitrogen into the measurement chamber is stopped, and WVTR is estimated by measuring a change in the amount of water vapor that passes through the sample and gradually accumulates in the measurement chamber. The static measurement method is capable of measuring WVTR even at 10−6 level with high sensitivity, but the accuracy tends to be low.
- The third mode is a diffusion control method. In the diffusion control method, supply of dry nitrogen into the measurement chamber is stopped and dry nitrogen is discharged through a narrow tube connected to the measurement chamber. The diffusion control method is a method in which WVTR is estimated using Fick's law of diffusion and has advantages of both the dynamic measurement method and the static measurement method. The diffusion control method is suitable for performing measurement on a sample whose WVTR is known to be low in advance.
-
FIG. 20A schematically illustrates the measurement method. The water vapor transmission rate can be measured in such a manner that water vapor is supplied from thesubstrate 396 side of the sample and water vapor transmitted to the sealingresin 390 side is detected. -
FIG. 20B andFIG. 25 show measurement results. InFIG. 20B andFIG. 25 , the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents water vapor transmission rate (WVTR). As shown inFIG. 20B andFIG. 25 , the water vapor transmission rate of the sample was less than 1×10−5 g/m2·day in the equilibrium state. - In addition, the water vapor transmission rate of the sample in the equilibrium state was less than or equal to 7×10−6 g/m2·day that is the lower measurement limit.
- In contrast, for example, the water vapor transmission rate of general aluminum foil is 1.5×10−4 g/m2·day and the water vapor transmission rate of a film with an excellent gas barrier property is 2×10−5 g/m2·day. Thus, the water vapor transmission rates of the samples fabricated in this example were much lower than those of the aluminum foil and the film with an excellent gas barrier property.
- Next, a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating
layer 392 having the above-described structure, and a preservation test was performed on the light-emitting device. -
FIG. 30A shows a mask pattern of an examination sample in the preservation test. Specifically, a light-emitting area with a size of 2 mm2 that was 10 mm or more away from an end portion of the sample was examined so that examination results were not adversely affected by entry of impurities such as moisture from a side surface of the sample. - A method for fabricating the examination sample is described with reference to
FIGS. 31A to 31C . First, an approximately 200-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as a base film over aglass substrate 181 by a plasma CVD method. Then, an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed as apeeling layer 183 by a sputtering method. - Next, N2O plasma treatment was performed on a surface of the tungsten film, and then an insulating
layer 185 was formed. Since a structure and a formation method of the insulatinglayer 185 are the same as those of the insulating layer 392 (FIG. 20A ), the description thereof is omitted. After that, heat treatment was performed at 450° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere for 1 hour. Then, anelement layer 187 was formed over the insulatinglayer 185. - The
element layer 187 includes an organic EL element emitting blue light. A 100-nm-thick silicon oxide film and a 100-nm-thick silicon nitride film were formed as aprotective layer 189 by a sputtering method in order to suppress deterioration of the organic EL element due to entry of impurities such as moisture from a side surface of the examination sample and a gas released from a resin used for a bonding layer. After that, aglass substrate 193 was attached to theprotective layer 189 with a bonding layer 191 (FIG. 31A ). As thebonding layer 191, an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin was used. Then, theglass substrate 181 was peeled (FIG. 31B ), and aresin substrate 197 was attached to the exposed insulatinglayer 185 with a bonding layer 195 (FIG. 31C ). As thebonding layer 195, a two-component epoxy resin was used. - Note that it was examined whether the characteristics of the organic EL element were changed because of the peeling of the
glass substrate 181 and the transfer of theelement layer 187 to theresin substrate 197.FIG. 32A shows current-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the peeling and transfer process. There was no difference in the characteristics between before and after the peeling and transfer process. This indicates that the peeling and transfer process did not cause deterioration of the electrical characteristics such as a short circuit or an increase in contact resistance.FIG. 32B shows luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the peeling and transfer process. The dependence of luminance on voltage and the rising voltage did not change. This indicates that the peeling and transfer process also did not cause damage to a material contained in the organic EL element, a change in outcoupling efficiency, and the like. The above results confirmed that the method for fabricating the light-emitting device including the peeling and transfer process did not adversely affect the characteristics of the organic EL element. - Next, a preservation test was performed. Specifically, the examination sample was preserved at a temperature of 65° C. and a humidity of 90% for 500 hours.
FIG. 30B are photographs showing light emission before and after the preservation test.FIG. 30B are three photographs showing light emission before the preservation test, light emission after a lapse of 240 hours from the start of the preservation test, and light emission after a lapse of 500 hours from the start of the preservation test. Here, the sample was observed with an optical microscope at 50-fold magnification. Even after a lapse of 500 hours from the start of the preservation test, an increase in the number of dark spots and shrink were not observed. - In addition, the characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the preservation test are described.
FIG. 33A shows current-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the preservation test, andFIG. 33B shows luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element before and after the preservation test. The current-voltage characteristics and the luminance-voltage characteristics of the organic EL element did not change even in the preservation test for 500 hours. This revealed that the use of the insulating layer formed in this example can suppress deterioration of the organic EL element. - In this example, a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating
layer 392 formed in Example 2 and the reliability of the light-emitting device was evaluated. - Since the light-emitting device fabricated in this example is the same as the light-emitting device in Structure Example 5 described with reference to
FIG. 14B inEmbodiment 2, the description of the light-emitting device is omitted. In this example, the insulatinglayer 392 formed in Example 2 was used as the insulatinglayers - A preservation test was performed on the fabricated light-emitting device at a temperature of 65° C. and a humidity of 90% RH for 1000 hours.
-
FIGS. 21A and 21B are optical micrographs showing light emission states of a central portion of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test.FIGS. 21A and 21B are the optical micrographs before the preservation test and after a lapse of 1000 hours from the start of the preservation test, respectively. - As shown in
FIG. 21B , defects such as a decrease in luminance and formation of a non-light-emitting region were not caused even in the preservation test. This means that as described in Example 2, the use of insulating layers with an extremely low water vapor transmission rate for the insulatinglayers - In this example, a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating
layer 392 formed in Example 2 and the reliability of the light-emitting device was evaluated. The light-emitting device fabricated in this example is a bendable display. -
FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate the light-emitting device fabricated in this example.FIG. 24A is a plan view of the light-emitting device, andFIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed dotted line X7-Y7 inFIG. 24A . The light-emitting device fabricated in this example is different from that in Structure Example 5 described with reference toFIG. 14B inEmbodiment 2 in that theflexible substrate 428 is smaller than theflexible substrate 420. The description of Structure Example 5 can be referred to for the other parts. - In this example, the light-emitting device was fabricated by
Peeling Method 4 described inEmbodiment 1. - First, the
peeling layer 203 was formed over a glass substrate serving as theformation substrate 201, and the layer to be peeled 205 was formed over thepeeling layer 203. In addition, thepeeling layer 223 was formed over a glass substrate serving as theformation substrate 221, and the layer to be peeled 225 was formed over thepeeling layer 223. Next, theformation substrate 201 and theformation substrate 221 were attached so that the surfaces provided with the respective layers to be peeled faced each other. Then, the two formation substrates were peeled from the respective layers to be peeled, and flexible substrates were attached to the respective layers to be peeled. Materials for each of the layers are described below. - A stacked-layer structure of a tungsten film and a tungsten oxide film thereover was formed as each of the peeling layers 203 and 223. Specifically, an approximately 30-nm-thick tungsten film was formed by a sputtering method and subjected to N2O plasma treatment, and then a layer to be peeled was formed.
- The peeling layer having the stacked-layer structure right after deposition is not easily peeled; however, by reaction with an inorganic insulating film by heat treatment, the state of the interface between the peeling layer and the inorganic insulating film is changed to become brittle. Then, forming a peeling trigger enables physical peeling.
- The insulating
layer 424, a transistor, and theorganic EL element 450 were formed as the layer to be peeled 205. A color filter, which corresponds to thecoloring layer 432, and the like were formed as the layer to be peeled 225. - The insulating
layer 392 formed in Example 2 was used as the insulatinglayers - As the transistor, a transistor including a c-axis aligned crystalline oxide semiconductor (CAAC-OS) was used. Since the CAAC-OS, which is not amorphous, has few defect states, using the CAAC-OS can improve the reliability of the transistor. Moreover, since the CAAC-OS does not have a grain boundary, stress that is caused by bending a flexible device does not easily make a crack in a CAAC-OS film.
- A CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor having c-axis alignment in a direction perpendicular to the film surface. It has been found that oxide semiconductors have a variety of crystal structures other than an amorphous structure and a single-crystal structure. An example of such structures is a nano-crystal (nc)-OS, which is an aggregate of nanoscale microcrystals. The crystallinity of the CAAC-OS is lower than that of a single crystal structure but higher than those of an amorphous structure and an nc-OS.
- In this example, a channel-etched transistor including an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide was used. The transistor can be fabricated over a glass substrate at a process temperature lower than 500° C.
- In a method for fabricating an element such as a transistor directly on an organic resin such as a plastic substrate, the temperature of the process for fabricating the element needs to be lower than the upper temperature limit of the organic resin. In this example, the formation substrate is a glass substrate and the peeling layer, which is an inorganic film, has high heat resistance; thus, the transistor can be fabricated at a temperature equal to that when a transistor is fabricated over a glass substrate. Thus, the performance and reliability of the transistor can be easily secured.
- As the
organic EL element 450, a tandem organic EL element that included a fluorescence-emitting unit including a blue light-emitting layer and a phosphorescence-emitting unit including a green light-emitting layer and a red light-emitting layer was used. Theorganic EL element 450 is a top-emission organic EL element. As thefirst electrode 401 of theorganic EL element 450, an aluminum film, a titanium film over the aluminum film, and an ITO film serving as an optical adjustment layer over the titanium film were stacked. The thickness of the optical adjustment layer was varied depending on the color of the pixel. Owing to the combination of a color filter and a microcavity structure, light with high color purity can be extracted from the light-emitting device fabricated in this example. A 20-μm-thick organic resin film was used as theflexible substrates -
FIG. 26 illustrates the light-emitting device fabricated in this example. The fabricated light-emitting device had a size of a light-emitting portion (pixel portion) of 3.4 inches diagonal, 540×960×3 (RGB) pixels, a pixel pitch of 0.078 mm×0.078 mm, a resolution of 326 ppi, and an aperture ratio of 56.9%. The light-emitting device had a built-in scan driver (gate driver) and source driver. In addition, the light-emitting device had a thickness of less than or equal to 100 μm and a weight of 2 g. Note that different light-emitting devices were used for different bending tests. - The fabricated light-emitting device was bent repeatedly while displaying an image. As illustrated in
FIG. 26 , a bent portion is a middle portion of the light-emitting device and includes the light-emitting portion and the scan driver.FIG. 22A is a photograph showing a bend tester where the light-emitting device is set.FIG. 22B shows how a bending test is performed. Fixing the side where an FPC is provided allows the bending test to be performed while the light-emitting device is driven. As illustrated inFIG. 22C , the radius of curvature for bending a light-emittingdevice 99 was determined by the diameter of ametal rod 98. Four rods with diameters of 10 mm, 6 mm, 4 mm, and 2 mm were used as therod 98. In other words, four bending tests with radiuses of curvature of 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, and 1 mm were performed. Note that here, “outward bending” means bending performed such that a display surface of the light-emitting device faces outward, and “inward bending” means bending performed such that a display surface faces inward.FIG. 22B shows states during an inward bending test. In the bending test, one bending was performed in approximately 2 seconds. The results of the bending tests are described below. In the case where the radius of curvature was 5 mm, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally after either outward bending or inward bending performed 100000 times. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 3 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 2 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 1 mm was performed 4000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally. Furthermore, when inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed 300000 times on a light-emitting device with the same structure, a display portion also had no defect and a driver also operated normally. -
FIG. 27A shows the appearance of the light-emitting device after being subjected to bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm 100000 times.FIG. 27B shows display states before and after the bending test. As shown inFIG. 27A , warpage due to bending and a scratch on a surface were caused in the light-emitting device; however, the display state and the operation of the driver had no problem. Furthermore, a preservation test was performed at a high temperature of 65° C. and a high humidity of 90% for 100 hours after the bending test.FIG. 27C shows display states of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test. No defect was also observed in the bent portion after the preservation test, and a crack was probably not caused in the inorganic insulating film or the like in the light-emitting device. -
FIG. 28A shows the appearance of the light-emitting device after being subjected to the bending with a radius of curvature of 2 mm 100000 times.FIG. 28B shows display states before and after the bending test. As shown inFIG. 28A , warpage due to bending and a scratch on a surface were caused in the light-emitting device; however, the display state and the operation of the driver had no problem. Furthermore, a preservation test was performed at a high temperature of 65° C. and a high humidity of 90% for 100 hours after the bending test.FIG. 28C shows display states of the light-emitting device before and after the preservation test. No defect was also observed in the bent portion after the preservation test, and a crack was probably not caused in the inorganic insulating film or the like in the light-emitting device. - In the bending test with the bend tester, factors such as tensile stress, compressive stress, and friction are involved as well as simple bending.
- A bending test performed with a book-type bend tester that is capable of examining only resistance to bending is described below. In the bending test, the bend tester is repeatedly opened (
FIG. 29A ) and closed (FIG. 29B ) like a book. The radius of curvature for bending the light-emitting device was determined by setting the distance between plates when bent. - The bending characteristics of the light-emitting devices examined with the book-type bend tester are described. When inward bending with each of radiuses of curvature of 5 mm, 3 mm, and 2 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 1 mm was performed 9000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally. In addition, when inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed on a light-emitting device with the same structure 300000 times, a display portion also had no defect and a driver also operated normally. Less warpage due to the bending test was caused in the case where the book-type bend tester was used than in the case where the bend tester described above was used, and almost no warpage was observed when bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed with the book-type bend tester.
- As described above, a highly reliable flexible light-emitting device that had high resistance to repeated bending was able to be fabricated in this example.
- In this example, a light-emitting device was fabricated using the insulating
layer 392 formed in Example 2. The light-emitting device fabricated in this example is a book-type flexible organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display that can be repeatedly folded in two like a book. The light-emitting device can be bent such that a display surface faces inward. The light-emitting device can also be referred to as a bendable display. -
FIGS. 24A and 24B illustrate the light-emitting device fabricated in this example. Structures of the insulatinglayer 424, the insulatinglayer 226, a transistor, theorganic EL element 450, thefirst electrode 401, theflexible substrate 420, and theflexible substrate 428 in the light-emitting device are the same as those in the light-emitting device fabricated in Example 4; thus, the description thereof is omitted. In addition, a method for fabricating the light-emitting device and peeling layers used for the fabrication were the same as those described in Example 4. - The fabricated light-emitting device had a size of a light-emitting portion (pixel portion) of 5.9 inches diagonal, 720×1280×3 (RGB) pixels, a pixel pitch of 0.102 mm×0.102 mm, a resolution of 249 ppi, and an aperture ratio of 45.2%. A built-in scan driver and an external source driver attached by chip on film (COF) were used.
-
FIGS. 23A to 23C are photographs showing a display of the light-emitting device fabricated in this example.FIG. 23A shows the light-emitting device that is opened,FIG. 23B shows the light-emitting device that is being folded, andFIG. 23C shows the light-emitting device that is folded. The radius of curvature of a folded portion was 5 mm. The light-emitting device of this example had no problem in display and driving even when it was folded while displaying an image. - In addition, the fabricated light-emitting device was repeatedly bent while displaying an image. A method of the bending test was the same as that described in Example 4. When inward bending with a radius of curvature of 5 mm was performed 100000 times, the display portion had no defect and the driver operated normally.
- As described above, a highly reliable flexible light-emitting device that had high resistance to repeated bending was able to be fabricated in this example.
- This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial No. 2013-230532 filed with the Japan Patent Office on Nov. 6, 2013, Japanese Patent Application serial No. 2013-249158 filed with the Japan Patent Office on Dec. 2, 2013, and Japanese Patent Application serial No. 2014-029755 filed with the Japan Patent Office on Feb. 19, 2014, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims (21)
1. A peeling method comprising:
a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate;
a second step of forming a layer to be peeled that is in contact with the peeling layer and includes a first layer;
a third step of separating at least a part of the peeling layer to form a peeling trigger; and
a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled from the peeling trigger.
2. The peeling method according to claim 1 , wherein at least a stack comprising the first layer having stress with a negative value is formed as the layer to be peeled in the second step.
3. The peeling method according to claim 2 , wherein at least the first layer having stress with a negative value and a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer are formed as the stack in the second step.
4. The peeling method according to claim 2 , wherein at least the first layer having stress with a negative value, a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer, a third layer having stress with a negative value over the second layer, a fourth layer having stress with a positive value over the third layer, and a fifth layer having stress with a negative value over the fourth layer are formed as the stack in the second step.
5. The peeling method according to claim 3 ,
wherein the first layer comprises an oxide insulating film, and
wherein the second layer comprises a nitride insulating film.
6. The peeling method according to claim 1 , wherein N2O plasma treatment is not performed between the first step and the fourth step.
7. The peeling method according to claim 1 , wherein the peeling layer comprises tungsten.
8. The peeling method according to claim 1 , further comprising the steps of
forming a bonding layer overlapping the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, and
curing the bonding layer.
9. The peeling method according to claim 1 , further comprising the steps of:
forming a first bonding layer and a second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer, and
curing the first bonding layer and the second bonding layer,
wherein the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another.
10. A method for fabricating a semiconductor device, the method comprising:
a first step of forming a peeling layer to a thickness of greater than or equal to 0.1 nm and less than 10 nm over a substrate;
a second step of, forming a layer to be peeled that is in contact with the peeling layer and includes a first layer;
a third step of separating at least a part of the peeling layer to foil a peeling trigger; and
a fourth step of separating the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled from the peeling trigger.
11. The method according to claim 10 , wherein at least a stack comprising the first layer having stress with a negative value is formed as the layer to be peeled in the second step.
12. The method according to claim 11 , wherein at least the first layer having stress with a negative value and a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer are formed as the stack in the second step.
13. The method according to claim 11 , wherein at least the first layer having stress with a negative value, a second layer having stress with a negative value over the first layer, a third layer having stress with a negative value over the second layer, a fourth layer having stress with a positive value over the third layer, and a fifth layer having stress with a negative value over the fourth layer are formed as the stack in the second step.
14. The method according to claim 12 ,
wherein the first layer comprises an oxide insulating film, and
wherein the second layer comprises a nitride insulating film.
15. The method according to claim 10 , wherein N2O plasma treatment is not performed between the first step and the fourth step.
16. The method according to claim 10 , wherein the peeling layer comprises tungsten.
17. The method according to claim 10 , further comprising the steps of:
forming a bonding layer overlapping the peeling layer and the layer to be peeled, and
curing the bonding layer.
18. The method according to claim 10 , further comprising the steps of:
forming a first bonding layer and a second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer, and
curing the first bonding layer and the second bonding layer,
wherein the first bonding layer, the second bonding layer, the peeling layer, and the layer to be peeled overlap one another.
19. A light-emitting device comprising:
a first flexible substrate;
a second flexible substrate;
a light-emitting element between the first flexible substrate and the second flexible substrate;
a first insulating layer between the first flexible substrate and the light-emitting element; and
a first bonding layer between the second flexible substrate and the light-emitting element,
wherein the light-emitting element comprises a layer containing a light-emitting organic compound between a pair of electrodes, and
wherein a water vapor transmission rate of the first insulating layer is less than 1×10−5 g/m2·day.
20. The light-emitting device according to claim 19 , further comprising:
a second insulating layer between the second flexible substrate and the first bonding layer,
wherein a water vapor transmission rate of the second insulating layer is less than 1×10−5 g/m2·day.
21. The light-emitting device according to claim 19 , further comprising:
a frame-shaped second bonding layer surrounding the first bonding layer.
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2013230532 | 2013-11-06 | ||
JP2013-230532 | 2013-11-06 | ||
JP2013-249158 | 2013-12-02 | ||
JP2013249158 | 2013-12-02 | ||
JP2014029755 | 2014-02-19 | ||
JP2014-029755 | 2014-02-19 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20150123106A1 true US20150123106A1 (en) | 2015-05-07 |
US9937698B2 US9937698B2 (en) | 2018-04-10 |
Family
ID=53006361
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/532,634 Active 2034-12-31 US9937698B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2014-11-04 | Peeling method and light-emitting device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US9937698B2 (en) |
JP (2) | JP6513929B2 (en) |
Cited By (25)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20140055924A1 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2014-02-27 | Jong-In Baek | Flexible display device |
US20150212541A1 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-07-30 | Cheng Uei Precision Industry Co., Ltd. | Wearable electronic device |
US20150364721A1 (en) * | 2014-06-11 | 2015-12-17 | Japan Display Inc. | Display device |
US20150364718A1 (en) * | 2013-09-09 | 2015-12-17 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Package structure for flexible organic light emitting diode device, method for packaging the same and flexible display device |
US9466811B2 (en) | 2014-06-27 | 2016-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device, module, electronic device, and manufacturing method of light-emitting device |
US20160315227A1 (en) * | 2015-04-21 | 2016-10-27 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
US20170012026A1 (en) * | 2015-07-06 | 2017-01-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Display device using semiconductor light emitting device and method for manufacturing the same |
US20170062761A1 (en) * | 2015-08-27 | 2017-03-02 | Japan Display Inc. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
US20170179433A1 (en) * | 2015-12-22 | 2017-06-22 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US20180047609A1 (en) * | 2016-08-09 | 2018-02-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
US9905589B2 (en) | 2013-12-03 | 2018-02-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
US9952626B2 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2018-04-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20180114905A1 (en) * | 2015-04-13 | 2018-04-26 | Royole Corporation | Support and detachment of flexible substrates |
US10014494B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2018-07-03 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of detaching display module and method of manufacturing display module |
CN108293279A (en) * | 2015-11-24 | 2018-07-17 | 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 | Light-emitting device |
US20190019974A1 (en) * | 2017-07-12 | 2019-01-17 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of manufacturing display device |
US10259207B2 (en) | 2016-01-26 | 2019-04-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for forming separation starting point and separation method |
US10279576B2 (en) | 2016-04-26 | 2019-05-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Peeling method and manufacturing method of flexible device |
US10629831B2 (en) | 2016-07-29 | 2020-04-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Separation method, display device, display module, and electronic device |
US10679944B2 (en) * | 2018-09-21 | 2020-06-09 | United Microelectronics Corp. | Semiconductor structure with high resistivity wafer and fabricating method of bonding the same |
CN111727664A (en) * | 2018-02-27 | 2020-09-29 | 堺显示器制品株式会社 | Method for manufacturing flexible OLED device and supporting substrate |
CN112670240A (en) * | 2020-12-24 | 2021-04-16 | 深圳市华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Preparation method of array substrate and display panel |
US10991786B2 (en) * | 2017-09-20 | 2021-04-27 | Db Hitek Co., Ltd. | Signal control unit for an organic light emitting diode display device |
US11233218B2 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2022-01-25 | Fuzhou Boe Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. | Display panel including oppositely arranging the display substrate and the packaging cover plate to form a cell and method for packaging the same, and display device |
US11309521B2 (en) * | 2017-10-31 | 2022-04-19 | Kunshan New Flat Panel Display Technology Center Co., Ltd. | Flexible display module having a hollow defined middle |
Families Citing this family (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN109315042B (en) * | 2015-12-29 | 2021-04-06 | 鸿海精密工业股份有限公司 | Method and apparatus for peeling resin film, and method for manufacturing electronic device |
CN206758439U (en) * | 2017-04-14 | 2017-12-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panel and display device |
CN115803851B (en) * | 2021-01-21 | 2023-06-30 | 信越工程株式会社 | Workpiece separating device and workpiece separating method |
Family Cites Families (84)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP3352340B2 (en) | 1995-10-06 | 2002-12-03 | キヤノン株式会社 | Semiconductor substrate and method of manufacturing the same |
JP3364081B2 (en) | 1995-02-16 | 2003-01-08 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
US5891298A (en) | 1995-08-31 | 1999-04-06 | Nitto Denko Corporation | Method and apparatus for peeling protective adhesive tape from semiconductor wafer |
US6072239A (en) | 1995-11-08 | 2000-06-06 | Fujitsu Limited | Device having resin package with projections |
JP4619462B2 (en) | 1996-08-27 | 2011-01-26 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Thin film element transfer method |
KR100500520B1 (en) | 1996-08-27 | 2005-07-12 | 세이코 엡슨 가부시키가이샤 | A transferring method and a method for manufacturing an active matrix substrate |
US6127199A (en) | 1996-11-12 | 2000-10-03 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Manufacturing method of active matrix substrate, active matrix substrate and liquid crystal display device |
EP0849788B1 (en) | 1996-12-18 | 2004-03-10 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Process for producing semiconductor article by making use of a substrate having a porous semiconductor layer |
US6326279B1 (en) | 1999-03-26 | 2001-12-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Process for producing semiconductor article |
US6452091B1 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2002-09-17 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Method of producing thin-film single-crystal device, solar cell module and method of producing the same |
US6391220B1 (en) | 1999-08-18 | 2002-05-21 | Fujitsu Limited, Inc. | Methods for fabricating flexible circuit structures |
US6592739B1 (en) | 1999-11-29 | 2003-07-15 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Process and apparatus for forming zinc oxide film, and process and apparatus for producing photovoltaic device |
US7060153B2 (en) | 2000-01-17 | 2006-06-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
SG136795A1 (en) | 2000-09-14 | 2007-11-29 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP4803884B2 (en) | 2001-01-31 | 2011-10-26 | キヤノン株式会社 | Method for manufacturing thin film semiconductor device |
JP4302335B2 (en) | 2001-05-22 | 2009-07-22 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Manufacturing method of solar cell |
TW548860B (en) | 2001-06-20 | 2003-08-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Light emitting device and method of manufacturing the same |
TW564471B (en) | 2001-07-16 | 2003-12-01 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device and peeling off method and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP4027740B2 (en) | 2001-07-16 | 2007-12-26 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP4524561B2 (en) | 2001-07-24 | 2010-08-18 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Transfer method |
JP5057619B2 (en) | 2001-08-01 | 2012-10-24 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
TW554398B (en) | 2001-08-10 | 2003-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method of peeling off and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
TW558743B (en) * | 2001-08-22 | 2003-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Peeling method and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
TW594947B (en) | 2001-10-30 | 2004-06-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the same |
TWI264121B (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2006-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | A display device, a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device, and a method of manufacturing a display device |
US6953735B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for fabricating a semiconductor device by transferring a layer to a support with curvature |
DE60325669D1 (en) | 2002-05-17 | 2009-02-26 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method for transferring an object and method for producing a semiconductor device |
JP2004047823A (en) | 2002-07-12 | 2004-02-12 | Tokyo Seimitsu Co Ltd | Dicing tape sticking device and back grind dicing tape sticking system |
TWI272641B (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2007-02-01 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method of manufacturing a semiconductor device |
JP2004140267A (en) | 2002-10-18 | 2004-05-13 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device and fabrication method thereof |
JP4471563B2 (en) | 2002-10-25 | 2010-06-02 | 株式会社ルネサステクノロジ | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
WO2004040648A1 (en) | 2002-10-30 | 2004-05-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
KR101032337B1 (en) | 2002-12-13 | 2011-05-09 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Light emitting device and manufacturing method thereof |
US7056810B2 (en) | 2002-12-18 | 2006-06-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing semiconductor apparatus, and semiconductor apparatus and electric appliance |
JP4373085B2 (en) | 2002-12-27 | 2009-11-25 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device manufacturing method, peeling method, and transfer method |
CN102290422A (en) | 2003-01-15 | 2011-12-21 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Peeling method and method for manufacturing display device using the peeling method |
US7436050B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2008-10-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device having a flexible printed circuit |
TWI356658B (en) | 2003-01-23 | 2012-01-11 | Toray Industries | Members for circuit board, method and device for m |
JP4151421B2 (en) | 2003-01-23 | 2008-09-17 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Device manufacturing method |
JP2004311955A (en) | 2003-03-25 | 2004-11-04 | Sony Corp | Method for manufacturing very thin electro-optical display device |
JP2004327728A (en) * | 2003-04-24 | 2004-11-18 | Seiko Epson Corp | Transcription method, process for producing transcription matter, process for producing circuit board, electro-optical device, and electronic equipment |
TWI372462B (en) | 2003-10-28 | 2012-09-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
WO2005045908A1 (en) | 2003-11-06 | 2005-05-19 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Method for bonding substrate, bonded substrate, and direct bonded substrate |
KR101095293B1 (en) | 2003-11-28 | 2011-12-16 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Method of manufacturing display device |
US7566640B2 (en) | 2003-12-15 | 2009-07-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing thin film integrated circuit device, noncontact thin film integrated circuit device and method for manufacturing the same, and idtag and coin including the noncontact thin film integrated circuit device |
US7271076B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2007-09-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of thin film integrated circuit device and manufacturing method of non-contact type thin film integrated circuit device |
US7015075B2 (en) | 2004-02-09 | 2006-03-21 | Freescale Semiconuctor, Inc. | Die encapsulation using a porous carrier |
CN100521117C (en) | 2004-02-25 | 2009-07-29 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor apparatus and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2006049800A (en) | 2004-03-10 | 2006-02-16 | Seiko Epson Corp | Thin film device feeder, manufacturing method thereof, transfer method, manufacturing method of semiconductor device, and electronic machine |
US7282380B2 (en) | 2004-03-25 | 2007-10-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
KR101020661B1 (en) | 2004-06-02 | 2011-03-09 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
JP4054359B2 (en) | 2004-07-02 | 2008-02-27 | シャープ株式会社 | Film peeling method and apparatus |
US7591863B2 (en) | 2004-07-16 | 2009-09-22 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Laminating system, IC sheet, roll of IC sheet, and method for manufacturing IC chip |
WO2006011664A1 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2006-02-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
KR101254277B1 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2013-04-15 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Laminating system, IC sheet, scroll of IC sheet, and method for manufacturing IC chip |
WO2006033451A1 (en) | 2004-09-24 | 2006-03-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
CN101036422B (en) | 2004-10-01 | 2010-04-14 | 东丽株式会社 | Long film circuit board, and production method and production device therefor |
US7482248B2 (en) | 2004-12-03 | 2009-01-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
JP4649198B2 (en) | 2004-12-20 | 2011-03-09 | 新光電気工業株式会社 | Wiring board manufacturing method |
CN101950748B (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2013-06-12 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
US7566633B2 (en) | 2005-02-25 | 2009-07-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
TWI413152B (en) | 2005-03-01 | 2013-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
JP4795743B2 (en) | 2005-05-19 | 2011-10-19 | リンテック株式会社 | Pasting device |
WO2006123825A1 (en) | 2005-05-20 | 2006-11-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
US7465674B2 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2008-12-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
US8030132B2 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2011-10-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device including peeling step |
JP5210501B2 (en) * | 2005-06-01 | 2013-06-12 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP4916680B2 (en) * | 2005-06-30 | 2012-04-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Manufacturing method and peeling method of semiconductor device |
EP1760776B1 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2019-12-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method for semiconductor device with flexible substrate |
US7767543B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2010-08-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing a micro-electro-mechanical device with a folded substrate |
TWI424499B (en) | 2006-06-30 | 2014-01-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
US8137417B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2012-03-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Peeling apparatus and manufacturing apparatus of semiconductor device |
TWI570900B (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2017-02-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
US7867907B2 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2011-01-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP4380709B2 (en) * | 2007-01-31 | 2009-12-09 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
EP1970951A3 (en) * | 2007-03-13 | 2009-05-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2010050313A (en) * | 2008-08-22 | 2010-03-04 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method of transferring thin film and method of manufacturing thin film electronic device |
JP5586920B2 (en) | 2008-11-20 | 2014-09-10 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing flexible semiconductor device |
JP2011165788A (en) * | 2010-02-08 | 2011-08-25 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method of manufacturing semiconductor element substrate |
WO2013031509A1 (en) | 2011-08-26 | 2013-03-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device, electronic device, lighting device, and method for manufacturing the light-emitting device |
JP6150733B2 (en) * | 2012-01-05 | 2017-06-21 | 株式会社カネカ | Manufacturing method of organic EL device |
KR20140029202A (en) | 2012-08-28 | 2014-03-10 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
TWI642094B (en) | 2013-08-06 | 2018-11-21 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Peeling method |
TWI663722B (en) | 2013-09-06 | 2019-06-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device and method for manufacturing light-emitting device |
-
2014
- 2014-11-04 JP JP2014224177A patent/JP6513929B2/en active Active
- 2014-11-04 US US14/532,634 patent/US9937698B2/en active Active
-
2019
- 2019-04-11 JP JP2019075437A patent/JP6725720B2/en active Active
Cited By (38)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20140055924A1 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2014-02-27 | Jong-In Baek | Flexible display device |
US9295168B2 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2016-03-22 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Flexible display device |
US20150364718A1 (en) * | 2013-09-09 | 2015-12-17 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Package structure for flexible organic light emitting diode device, method for packaging the same and flexible display device |
US9431630B2 (en) * | 2013-09-09 | 2016-08-30 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Package structure for flexible organic light emitting diode device, method for packaging the same and flexible display device |
US9905589B2 (en) | 2013-12-03 | 2018-02-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
US9952626B2 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2018-04-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20150212541A1 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-07-30 | Cheng Uei Precision Industry Co., Ltd. | Wearable electronic device |
US9274506B2 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2016-03-01 | Cheng Uei Precision Industry Co., Ltd. | Wearable electronic device |
US20150364721A1 (en) * | 2014-06-11 | 2015-12-17 | Japan Display Inc. | Display device |
US9466811B2 (en) | 2014-06-27 | 2016-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device, module, electronic device, and manufacturing method of light-emitting device |
US10468625B2 (en) | 2014-06-27 | 2019-11-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device, module, and electronic device |
US10529924B2 (en) * | 2015-04-13 | 2020-01-07 | Shenzhen Royole Technologies Co. Ltd. | Support and detachment of flexible substrates |
US20180114905A1 (en) * | 2015-04-13 | 2018-04-26 | Royole Corporation | Support and detachment of flexible substrates |
US9773823B2 (en) * | 2015-04-21 | 2017-09-26 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
US20160315227A1 (en) * | 2015-04-21 | 2016-10-27 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
US9837389B2 (en) * | 2015-07-06 | 2017-12-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Display device using semiconductor light emitting device and method for manufacturing the same |
US20170012026A1 (en) * | 2015-07-06 | 2017-01-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Display device using semiconductor light emitting device and method for manufacturing the same |
US20170062761A1 (en) * | 2015-08-27 | 2017-03-02 | Japan Display Inc. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
US10115774B2 (en) * | 2015-08-27 | 2018-10-30 | Japan Display Inc. | Display device and method of manufacturing the same |
CN108293279A (en) * | 2015-11-24 | 2018-07-17 | 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 | Light-emitting device |
US20170179433A1 (en) * | 2015-12-22 | 2017-06-22 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US10026928B2 (en) * | 2015-12-22 | 2018-07-17 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US10259207B2 (en) | 2016-01-26 | 2019-04-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for forming separation starting point and separation method |
US10279576B2 (en) | 2016-04-26 | 2019-05-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Peeling method and manufacturing method of flexible device |
US10629831B2 (en) | 2016-07-29 | 2020-04-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Separation method, display device, display module, and electronic device |
US11616206B2 (en) | 2016-07-29 | 2023-03-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Separation method, display device, display module, and electronic device |
US10930870B2 (en) | 2016-07-29 | 2021-02-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Separation method, display device, display module, and electronic device |
US20180047609A1 (en) * | 2016-08-09 | 2018-02-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
US10861733B2 (en) * | 2016-08-09 | 2020-12-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
US10014494B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2018-07-03 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of detaching display module and method of manufacturing display module |
US20190019974A1 (en) * | 2017-07-12 | 2019-01-17 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of manufacturing display device |
US10991786B2 (en) * | 2017-09-20 | 2021-04-27 | Db Hitek Co., Ltd. | Signal control unit for an organic light emitting diode display device |
US11309521B2 (en) * | 2017-10-31 | 2022-04-19 | Kunshan New Flat Panel Display Technology Center Co., Ltd. | Flexible display module having a hollow defined middle |
US11183674B2 (en) * | 2018-02-27 | 2021-11-23 | Sakai Display Products Corporation | Method for manufacturing flexible OLED device and support substrate |
CN111727664A (en) * | 2018-02-27 | 2020-09-29 | 堺显示器制品株式会社 | Method for manufacturing flexible OLED device and supporting substrate |
US10679944B2 (en) * | 2018-09-21 | 2020-06-09 | United Microelectronics Corp. | Semiconductor structure with high resistivity wafer and fabricating method of bonding the same |
US11233218B2 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2022-01-25 | Fuzhou Boe Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. | Display panel including oppositely arranging the display substrate and the packaging cover plate to form a cell and method for packaging the same, and display device |
CN112670240A (en) * | 2020-12-24 | 2021-04-16 | 深圳市华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Preparation method of array substrate and display panel |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP6725720B2 (en) | 2020-07-22 |
US9937698B2 (en) | 2018-04-10 |
JP2019153795A (en) | 2019-09-12 |
JP6513929B2 (en) | 2019-05-15 |
JP2015173249A (en) | 2015-10-01 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9937698B2 (en) | Peeling method and light-emitting device | |
US10079353B2 (en) | Light-emitting device with flexible substrates | |
US11778850B2 (en) | Light-emitting device, module, electronic device, and method for manufacturing light-emitting device | |
US11355729B2 (en) | Light-emitting device and method for manufacturing light-emitting device | |
US10164219B2 (en) | Peeling method | |
US9977524B2 (en) | Flexible touch panel including a bonding layer | |
US9770894B2 (en) | Peeling apparatus and stack manufacturing apparatus | |
JP6468686B2 (en) | I / O device | |
KR20170063378A (en) | Display device and electronic device | |
JP2016066607A (en) | Exfoliation method, light-emitting device, module and electronic apparatus | |
JP2015046391A (en) | Light-emitting device, and electronic equipment |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD., JAPAN Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:YASUMOTO, SEIJI;SATO, MASATAKA;AOYAMA, TOMOYA;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20141017 TO 20141020;REEL/FRAME:034101/0427 |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Year of fee payment: 4 |